All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and
explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you
may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehi-
cle.
* Trademarks and tradenames owned in Canada by Hyundai Auto Canada
Corp. which carries on business as Hyundai Auto Canada.
OWNER'S
MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
F2
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-
formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-
lished by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies in your country.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-
tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
✽
NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
F4
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-
fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
Hyundai Auto Canada Corp. also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be
required.
HYUNDAI AUTO CANADA
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man-
ual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
This Owner's manual copyright 2015, Hyundai Auto Canada Corp. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be repro-
duced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Hyundai Auto
Canada Corp.
All trademarks and tradenames owned in Canada by Hyundai Auto Canada Corp.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet
Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page
8-5 in the Vehicle Specifications and consumer information section of the Owner's Manual.
F5
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts
1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same
parts used by Hyundai to manufacture
vehicles. They are designed and tested
for the optimum safety, performance,
and reliability to our customers.
2. Why should you use genuine parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-
neered and built to meet rigid manu-
facturing requirements. Using imita-
tion, counterfeit or used salvage parts
is not covered under the Hyundai Auto
Canada’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty or any other Hyundai warran-
ty.
In addition, any damage to or failure of
Hyundai Genuine Parts caused by the
installation or failure of an imitation,
counterfeit or used salvage part is not
covered by Hyundai Auto Canada.
3. How can you tell if you are purchas-
ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Logo on the package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to
are packaged with labels written only
in English.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold
throughauthorizedHyundai
Dealerships.
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
A100A03L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
1
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-3
Vehicle break-in process / 1-5
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders / 1-6
Introduction
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving experience from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist
you in many ways. We strongly recom-
mend that you read the entire manual. In
order to minimize the chance of death or
injury, you must read the WARNING and
CAUTION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the text in this
manual to best explain how to use your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under vari-
ous road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents. A good
place to start is the index; it has an alpha-
betical listing of all information in your
manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various WARNINGS, CAU-
TIONS, and NOTICES in this manual.
These WARNINGS were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.You should
carefully read and follow ALL procedures
and recommendations provided in these
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-
ful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may
result in harm, serious injury or
death to you or other persons if the
warning is not heeded. Follow the
advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may
result in damage to your vehicle or
its equipment if the caution is not
heeded. Follow the advice provided
with the caution.
13
Introduction
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-
sions and spark plug fouling.
Your new vehicle is designed to use only
unleaded fuel having a pump octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not
use methanol blended fuels.)
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system,
engine control system and emission con-
trol system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per-
cent gasoline, and is manufactured
exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel
Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with
your vehicle. Use of “E85” may result in
poor engine performance and damage to
your vehicle's engine and fuel system.
HYUNDAI recommends that customers
do not use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 10 percent.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.)
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the fuel cap open
warning light will illuminate.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel
system or any performance prob-
lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
Introduction
41
Other fuels
Using fuels such as;
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metallic additives contained
fuels,
may cause vehicle and engine damage
or cause plugging, misfiring, poor accel-
eration, engine stalling, catalyst melting,
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction,
etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽
NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or perform-
ance problem caused by the use of these
fuels may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warrenty.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful man-
ganese-based fuel additives such as
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl).
HYUNDAI does not recommend the use
of gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and affect your emission con-
trol system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the
cluster may come on.
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content
2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
15
Introduction
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and damage components of
the fuel system, engine control system
and emission control system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasolines treated with deter-
gent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent
deposit formation in the engine. These
gasolines will help the engine run clean-
er and enhance performance of the
Emission Control System. For more infor-
mation on TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline, please go to the website
(www.toptiergas.com)
For customers who do not use TOP Tier
Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have
problems starting or the engine does not
run smoothly, additives that you can buy
separately may be added to the gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
available, one bottle of additive added to
the fuel tank at every 12,000 km (7,500
mile) or every engine oil change is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding reg-
istration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-
able.
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
Introduction
61
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hit-
ting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehi-
cle's systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi-
cle is designed to record such data
as:
• How various systems in your vehi-
cle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and pas-
senger safety belts were buckled/
fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-
ation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, spe-
cial equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
2
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-3
Engine compartment / 2-4
Your vehicle at a glance
Your vehicle at a glance
22
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
OFS013001N
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-20
2. Outside rearview mirror control
switch...................................................4-46
3. Central door lock switch....................4-21
4. Power window lock switch.................4-30
5. Power window switches ....................4-27
6. Hood release lever............................4-31
7. Instrument panel illumination control
switch................................................4-50
8. Heated steering wheel* ....................4-44
9. ESC OFF button ...............................5-45
10. Rear parking assist system OFF
switch*.............................................4-78
11. Active ECO switch ..........................5-55
12. AC inverter switch*........................4-121
13. Fuse box .........................................7-62
14. Brake pedal
15. Accelerator pedal
16. Steering wheel ..................................4-40
17. Fuel filler lid release lever .................4-33
18. Mirror .................................................4-45
* : if equipped
❈ The actual interior in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
23
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
OFS012002N
1. Instrument cluster.............................4-48
2. Horn .................................................4-44
3. Driver’s front air bag.........................3-47
4. Light control/Turn signals .................4-83
5. Wiper/Washer...................................4-88
6. Ignition switch*/
Engine start/stop button..............5-5, 5-8
7. Hazard warning flasher
switch ........................................4-82, 6-3
8. Climate control system .........4-95, 4-104
9. Shift lever .............5-13, 5-16, 5-23, 5-31
10. Parking brake .................................5-41
11. Passenger’s front air bag ...............3-47
12. Glove box .....................................4-116
* : if equipped
❈ The actual instrument panel in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
42
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-33
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-31
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-36
4. Positive battery terminal ...................7-46
5. Negative battery terminal..................7-46
6. Fuse box ...........................................7-62
7. Air cleaner.........................................7-38
8. Radiator cap .....................................7-35
9. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-31
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-37
OFS011003/OFS012004
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■ Gasoline 1.6 GDI
■ Gasoline 1.6 Turbo GDI
3
Seats / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-15
Child restraint system / 3-26
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-34
Safety features of your vehicle
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat adjustment, forward/backward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(4) Lumbar support*
(5) Driver seat folding lever
(6) Seat warmer*
(7) Headrest adjustment
Front passenger seat
(8) Seat adjustment, forward/backward
(9) Seatback recliner
(10) Seat warmer*
(11) Headrest adjustment
Rear seat
(12) Headrest adjustment
(13) Split folding rear seat
* if equipped
SEATS
❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OFS034001C
33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
while maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. We recom-
mend that your chest be at least
250 mm (10 inches) away from
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for passengers
Riding in a vehicle with the seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
seat is reclined during an accident,
the occupant’s hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt, applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the passen-
ger to keep the seatback in an
upright position whenever the vehi-
cle is in motion.
WARNING - Upright
seating
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants
around the seat. If the seatback is
returned without being held and
controlled, the back of the seat
could spring forward resulting in
accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an acci-
dent or a sudden stop. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result
because the seat belt can't operate
normally.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
(Continued)
• Luggage and other cargo should
be laid flat in the cargo area. If
objects are large, heavy, or must
be piled, they must be secured.
Under no circumstances should
cargo be piled higher than the
seatbacks. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop, collision or rollover.
WARNING - Rear seat-
backs
• The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, passen-
gers and objects could be thrown
forward resulting in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
• No passenger should ride in the
cargo area or sit or lie on folded
seatbacks while the vehicle is
moving. All passengers must be
properly seated in seats and
restrained properly while riding.
• When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure it
is securely latched by pushing it
forward and rearwards.
• To avoid the possibility of burns,
do not remove the carpet in the
cargo area. Emission control
devices beneath this floor gener-
ate high temperatures.
(Continued)
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or reverse without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
• Do not adjust the seat while wear-
ing seat belts. Moving the seat
cushion forward may cause
strong pressure on the abdomen.
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you oper-
ate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
• Use extreme caution when pick-
ing small objects trapped under
the seats or between the seat and
the center console. Your hands
might be cut or injured by the
sharp edges of the seats mecha-
nism.
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up
and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
Adjusting the seatback recliner
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat cushion,
move the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever
up several times.
OFS033007
OFS033004
OFS033002
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch on
the side of the drivers seat. Press the
front portion of the switch to increase
support, or the rear portion of the switch,
to decrease support.
Driver’s seat folding lever
If you pull the lever to backward, the driv-
er seat will be folded. You can get out
from rear seat to outside.
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps to protect the head and neck
in the event of a collision.
OFS033005
WARNING
While driving, do not control the
lever. If not, the unexpected acci-
dent may occur.
OFS035055LOFS034064C
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
OFS031010
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest posi-
tion of the driver’s seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and seat
cushion raised, the headrest may
come in contact with the sunvisor
or other parts of the vehicle.
OYFH034205
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Removal
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button (3)
while pulling the headrest up (4).
Reinstall
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release but-
ton (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate
height.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned ON.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
OFS031013OFS033071-1
WARNING
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after reinstalling
and adjusting it properly.
OFS033070-1
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat
with the headrest removed.
39
Safety features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
• If the seat warmer doesn't work when
the ambient temperature is below 21
°C (70 °F), have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an acci-
dent they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occu-
pants.
OFS031014
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time. The occu-
pants must be able to feel if the
seat is becoming too warm and to
turn the seat warmer off. The seat
warmer may cause burns even at
low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
In particular, the driver must exer-
cise extreme care for the following
types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Rear seat adjustment
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold the rear seat
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the
pocket between the rear seatback and
cushion, and insert the rear seat belt in
the guide to prevent the seat belt from
being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to lowest
position.
4. Pull the lock release lever (1) and fold
the rear seatback forward and down
firmly.
OFS031018
OFS031019
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry
longer objects than could not oth-
erwise be accommodated.
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the car is moving as this is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seats. This could allow cargo
to slide forward and cause injury or
damage during sudden stops.
311
Safety features of your vehicle
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward. Pull the seatback
firmly until it clicks into place. Make
sure the seatback is locked in place.
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it has
locked into position by pushing on the
top of the seatback.
6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position.
7. When the seatback is completely
installed, check the seatback folding
lever again.
✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, after returning
the seatback to the upright position,
press the seatbelt and seatback at the
same time. Then pull the belt out. You
will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
ORBR030031
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-
back is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seatback. Otherwise, in
an accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger com-
partment, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING - Upright
seating
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly. If the seatback
is returned without holding it, the
back of the seat could spring for-
ward resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
Safety features of your vehicle
123
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission is in P (Park) or
the manual transaxle is in R
(Reverse) or 1st, and the parking
brake is applied whenever loading
or unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehicle
to move if shift lever is inadvertent-
ly moved to another position.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision which can
cause injury to vehicle occupants.
Special care of objects should be
taken when placing them in the rear
seats, since those may hit the front
seat occupants in a frontal collision.
OUN026140
WARNING
Rear seat occupants should always
remain in the center of the seat
cushion so the occupant’s head is
protected by the headrest.
If not, the tailgate may hit the occu-
pant’s head, which could cause an
injury.
CAUTION - Damaging rear
seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear seatback or
put luggage on the rear seat cush-
ion, insert the buckle in the pocket
between the rear seatback and
cushion. Doing so can prevent the
buckle from being damaged by the
rear seatback or luggage.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position.
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Headrest
The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-
rests in all the seating positions for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps to protect
the head and neck in the event of a colli-
sion.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
highest position (1) by pushing the
release button. To lower the headrest,
push and hold the release button (2) on
the headrest support and lower the head-
rest to the lowest position (3).
OFS035056L
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. The use
of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
OFS031015
Safety features of your vehicle
143
Removal (if equipped)
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes while press-
ing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it for prop-
er protection of the occupants.
OFS031016
315
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis, chest
and shoulders, as applicable; wear-
ing the lap section of the belt
across the abdominal area must be
avoided.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always wear both the shoulder
portion and lap portion of the
lap/shoulder belt.
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt
webbing is straight and not twist-
ed.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged, replace it.
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and younger
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat. Never
allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat. If a child over 12
must be seated in the front seat,
he/she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as
far back as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the occu-
pant.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals and par-
ticularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild
soap and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in
a severe impact even if damage to
the assembly is not obvious. Belts
should not be worn with straps
twisted. Each seat belt assembly
must only be used by one occu-
pant; it is dangerous to put a belt
around a child being carried on the
occupant's lap.
Safety features of your vehicle
163
Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)
The driver's seat belt warning light and
chime will activate to the following table
when the ignition switch is in "ON" posi-
tion.
*
1
Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's
seat belt is buckled, the light will stop
within 6 seconds and chime will stop
immediately.
*
2
The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly while driving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
1GQA2083
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Chime-
Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 5 km/h
(3 mph)
6 seconds None
5 km/h ~
10 km/h
6 seconds
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
↓
Below 5 km/h
(3 mph)
6 seconds *
1
↓
Stop *
2
317
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
Shoulder belt extension guide
You can adjust the position of the shoul-
der belt extension guide for easier
access to the shoulder belt.
Set the belt extension guide to the posi-
tion (1~3) when using the seat belt.
B180A01NF-1
OFS031034
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt extension
guide is locked into position at
the appropriate height. Never
position the shoulder belt across
your neck or face. Improperly
positioned seat belts can cause
serious injuries in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to per-
sonal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
Safety features of your vehicle
183
Seat belts - Front passenger and rear
seat 3-point system with combination
locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Combination retractor type seat belts are
installed in the rear seat positions to help
accommodate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a combina-
tion retractor is also installed in the front
passenger seat position, it is strongly
recommended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER place
any infant restraint system in the front
seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the fea-
tures of both an emergency locking
retractor seat belt and an automatic lock-
ing retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat
belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab into the buckle. There will
be an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle. When not securing a
child restraint, the seat belt operates in
the same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended from
the retractor to allow the installation of a
child restraint system, the seat belt oper-
ation changes to allow the belt to retract,
but not to extend (Automatic Locking
Retractor Type). Refer to “Using a child
restraint system” in this section.
✽
NOTICE
Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection for
seated passengers in either emergency
or automatic locking modes, it is recom-
mended that seated passengers use the
emergency locking feature for improved
convenience. The automatic locking
function is intended to facilitate child
restraint installation. To convert from
the automatic locking feature to the
emergency locking operation mode,
allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully
retract.
B200A02NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt por-
tion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
319
Safety features of your vehicle
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should auto-
matically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions (or side collisions). The
pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated
in crashes where the frontal collision (or
side collisions) is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions
(or side collisions), the pre-tensioner will
activate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive tension
on the driver or passenger's seat belt
when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
✽
NOTICE
The pre-tensioner will activate not only
in a frontal collision but also in a side
collision, if the vehicle is equipped with
a side or curtain air bag or rollover.
B210A01NF-1/H
OED030300
WARNING
• Do not put anything near the
buckle. Placing objects near the
buckle can adversely affect the
buckle pre-tensioner and may
increase the risk of personal
injury in the event of a collision.
• For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twist-
ed and always sit properly on
your seat.
Safety features of your vehicle
203
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
✽
NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passen-
ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated in certain frontal collisions
or side collisions or rollovers.
The pre-tensioners will not be activat-
ed if the seat belts are not being worn
at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal oper-
ating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged periods.
Wash all exposed skin areas thorough-
ly after an accident in which the pre-
tensioner seat belts were activated.
• Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pre-
tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument
panel will illuminate for approximate-
ly 6 seconds after the ignition switch
has been turned to the ON position,
and then it should turn off.
8KMB3311
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehi-
cle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this manu-
al.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts prop-
erly.
321
Safety features of your vehicle
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned ON, or if it remains
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-
tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag
system as soon as possible.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After acti-
vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be done
by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadver-
tent activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehi-
cle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded, con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
Safety features of your vehicle
223
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the safety standards of your
country. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets safety stan-
dards of your country. The restraint
must be appropriate for your child's
height and weight. Check the label on
the child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions about
seat belts, air bags and occupant
seating contained in this manual.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and chil-
dren. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehi-
cle. The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
323
Safety features of your vehicle
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened snug on the hips and as low
as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt out of
position. Children are afforded the most
safety in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat. If a larger child
(over age 12) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoulder
belt and the seat should be placed in the
rearmost position. Children age 12 and
under should be restrained securely in
the rear seat. NEVER place a child age
12 and under in the front seat. NEVER
place a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women to lessen the chance
of injury in an accident. When a seat belt
is used, the lap belt portion should be
placed as low and snugly as possible on
the hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the unborn child is located
or above the abdomen where the
belt could seriously injure or even
cause the death of the unborn child
during an impact.
Safety features of your vehicle
243
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should con-
sult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve max-
imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-
tem, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front and rear seats should be in
an upright position when the car is mov-
ing. A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down in
the rear seat or if the seats are in a
reclined position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disas-
sembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. The protec-
tion of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work proper-
ly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will slide
under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's
neck could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be care-
ful not to damage the seat belt web-
bing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle will not be as strong and
could possibly fail during a colli-
sion or sudden stop, resulting in
serious injury.
325
Safety features of your vehicle
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected peri-
odically for wear or damage of any kind.
Any damaged parts should be replaced
as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. Additional questions concern-
ing seat belt operation should be directed
to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
263
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the front
seat. Larger children not in a child restraint
should use one of the seat belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child and/or
infant safety seats must be properly placed
and installed in the rear seat.You must use
a commercially available child restraint
system that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or
by a LATCH system (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger-side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint sys-
tem can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside tempera-
ture does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the lug-
gage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in the case of a sudden
stop or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
WARNING
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passen-
ger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the child restraint
system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use of
the child restraint.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over your-
self and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
327
Safety features of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the man-
ufacturer's instructions.
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadver-
tently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the win-
dows, or lock themselves or oth-
ers inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and repo-
sition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always proper-
ly position and secure children in
the rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floor of a
moving vehicle. During a colli-
sion or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicle’s interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fasten-
ing them over a child.
• After an accident, have an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat belt,
tether anchor and lower anchor.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system
in the rear right seat.
CRS09
OFS031022
Forward-facing child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Safety features of your vehicle
283
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and only
lock under extreme or emergency condi-
tions (emergency locking mode), you
must manually change these seat belts
to the automatic locking mode to secure
a child restraint.
Placing a passenger seat belt into
the automatic locking mode
The automatic locking mode will help
prevent the normal movement of the
child in the vehicle from causing the seat
belt to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following proce-
dure.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the vehicle and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, have
the system checked immediately
by your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint systems and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
increase the chance and/or
severity of injury in an accident.
• If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a child seat
(as described in the child seat
system manual), the headrest of
the respective seating position
shall be readjusted or entirely
removed.
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
E2MS103005
329
Safety features of your vehicle
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
If the vehicle headrest prevents proper
installation of a child seat (as described
in the child seat system manual), the
headrest of the respective seating posi-
tion shall be readjusted or entirely
removed.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat
belt all the way out. When the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is fully extend-
ed, it will shift the retractor to the
“Automatic locking” (child restraint)
mode.
OMD030054AOMD030053A
Safety features of your vehicle
303
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of
the seat belt to retract and listen for an
audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.
This indicates that the retractor is in
the “automatic locking” mode. If no dis-
tinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3
and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the belt
as possible by pushing down on the
child restraint system while feeding the
shoulder belt back into the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat belt is
holding it firmly in place. If it is not,
release the seat belt and repeat steps
2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in the
“Automatic locking” mode by attempt-
ing to pull more of the seat belt out of
the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor
is in the “Automatic locking” mode.
To remove the child restraint, press the
release button on the buckle and then pull
the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint
and allow the seat belt to retract fully.
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position, the
retractor will automatically switch
from the “Automatic locking” mode to
the emergency lock mode for normal
adult usage.
OMD030056A
WARNING - Automatic
locking mode
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully. Therefore, the pre-
ceding seven steps must be fol-
lowed each time a child restraint is
installed.
If the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your vehi-
cle turns or stops suddenly. A child
can be seriously injured or killed if
the child restraint is not properly
anchored to the car, including set-
ting the retractor to the Automatic
Locking mode.
OMD030055A
331
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the luggage room.
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrest,
route the tether strap under the head-
rest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback. In case of
interference between the child
restraint seat and the headrest
remove the particular head restraint
for better fitment of the child restraint
seat.
For more information about the use of
the headrests, refer to "Adjusting the
height up and down - Rear seat" in this
section.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the seat.
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether anchor
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load caused
by multiple seats may cause the
tethers or anchorage points to
break, causing serious injury or
death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not prop-
erly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
OFS032024R
OFS032023R
Safety features of your vehicle
323
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers make
child restraint seats that are labeled as
LATCH or LATCH-compatible child
restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children". These
seats include two rigid or webbing
mounted attachments that connect to
two LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the need to
use seat belts to attach the child seat in
the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located on
the left and right rear seat backs to indi-
cate the position of the lower anchors for
child restraints.
B230D01NF OFS031025
LATCH Anchor
Position Indicator
LATCH Anchor
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
333
Safety features of your vehicle
LATCH anchors have been provided in
your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are
located in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There is no
LATCH anchor provided for the center
rear seating position.
The LATCH anchors are located between
the seatback and the seat cushion of the
rear seat left and right outboard seating
positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-
compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH child
restraint, assure that the seat is properly
attached to the LATCH and tether
anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat before
you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from
side to side. Also try to tug the seat for-
ward. Check to see if the anchors hold
the seat in place.
WARNING
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
seriously injured or killed in a colli-
sion greatly increases.
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
LATCH lower anchors are only to
be used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions. Never
attempt to attach a LATCH
equipped seat in the center seating
position. You may damage the
anchors or the anchors may fail
and break in a collision.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt web-
bing to get scratched or pinched by
the child-seat latch and LATCH
anchor during the installation.
WARNING - Weight for
LATCH system
The recommended weight for the
LATCH system is under 29.48 kg
(65 lb).
How to calculate the child restraint
weight :
Child restraint weight =
29.48 kg (65 lb) - Child weight
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"LATCH" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt web-
bing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the
lower anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the lower anchors.
Safety features of your vehicle
343
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
OFS031026
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and
severity of injury in the event of a
collision or rollover.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON or START position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
serious frontal or side collision in order
to help protect the occupants from seri-
ous physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the air
bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a colli-
sion and its direction. These two factors
determine whether the sensors produce
an electronic deployment/ inflation sig-
nal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a num-
ber of factors including vehicle speed,
angles of impact and the density and
stiffness of the vehicles or objects which
your vehicle hits in the collision. The
determining, factors are not limited to
those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely inflate
and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will simply
see the deflated air bags hanging out of
their storage compartments after the
collision.
• In addition to inflating in certain side
collisions, vehicles equipped with a
rollover sensor, side air bags and cur-
tain air bags will inflate if the sensing
system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, side air
bags and curtain air bags will remain
inflated longer to help provide protec-
tion from ejection, especially when
used in conjunction with the seat belts.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of extreme-
ly short time in which a collision occurs
and the need to get the air bag
between the occupant and the vehicle
structures before the occupant impacts
those structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe colli-
sion and is thus a necessary part of air
bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also caus-
es the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steer-
ing wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possible
(at least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passenger should
always move their seat as far
back as possible and sit back in
their seat.
• Air bag inflates instantly in an
event of a collision, passengers
may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
a proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
Safety features of your vehicle
363
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce dis-
comfort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc.). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult with the doctor if
the symptom persists.
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
1JBH3051
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage areas
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
337
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it
would cause serious or fatal
injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, be sure to install the
child restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain air
bags could cause serious injury
or death to an infant or child.
W7-147
Safety features of your vehicle
383
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com-
ponents:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator (front passenger's seat
only)
11. Occupant classification system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt buckle sensors
13. Anchor pre-tensioner
14. Side pressure impact sensor
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require air
bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light " " on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about 6
seconds after the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, after which the SRS air
bag warning light " " should go out.
OFS035054L
●
●
●
●
●
W7-147
339
Safety features of your vehicle
The air bag modules are located both in
the center of the steering wheel and in
the front passenger's panel above the
glove box. When the SRSCM detects a
sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag
system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
B240B02L
Driver’s front air bag (2)
Safety features of your vehicle
403
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other con-
trols.
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggra-
vate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If the SRS air bag warn-
ing light " " does not illumi-
nate, or continuously remains on
after illuminating for about 6 sec-
onds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, or after
the engine is started, comes on
while driving, the SRS is not
working properly. If this occurs,
have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (3)
WARNING
• Do not install or place any acces-
sories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a pas-
senger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liq-
uid air freshener inside the vehi-
cle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous pro-
jectile and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
341
Safety features of your vehicle
Occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-
pant classification system in the front
passenger's seat.
The occupant classification system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air bag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The driver's front air bag is not affected
or controlled by the occupant classifica-
tion system.
Main components of occupant
classification system
• A detection device located within the
front passenger seat frame.
• Electronic system to determine whether
the front passenger air bag system
should be activated or deactivated.
• A warning light located on the instrument
panel which illuminates the words PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicating the
front passenger air bag system is deacti-
vated.
• The instrument panel air bag warning
light is interconnected with the occupant
classification system.
The purpose is to help reduce the risk of
injury or death from an inflating air bag to
certain front passenger seat occupants,
such as children, by requiring the air bag
to be automatically turned OFF.
For example, if a child restraint of the
type specified in the regulations is on the
seat, the occupant classification sensor
can detect it and cause the air bag to turn
OFF.
(Continued)
• Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key for ignition key, and turn the
engine start/stop button to the
OFF position for smart key. Never
remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Failure to heed this warning will
cause the SRS air bag warning
light to illuminate.
OFS032057N
WARNING
Do not put anything in front of the
passenger air bag off indicator
Safety features of your vehicle
423
Front passenger seat adult occupants
who are properly seated and wearing the
seat belt properly, should not cause the
passenger air bag to be automatically
turned OFF. For small adults it may be
turned OFF, however, if the occupant
does not sit in the seat properly (for
example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on the edge of the seat, or by otherwise
being out of position), this could cause
the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR BAG
"OFF" indicator on the center facia panel.
This system detects the conditions 1~4 in
the following table and activates or deacti-
vates the front passenger air bag based
on these conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person's legs comfort-
ably extended, feet on the floor, and
wearing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air bag
and the safety belt.
• The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which can
affect the classification system. These
include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center
console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
(7) Unauthorized replacement of seat
cover.
(8) Covering seat with blanket
343
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
Riding in an improper position or
placing weight on the front passen-
ger's seat when it is unoccupied by
a passenger adversely affects the
Occupant classification System
(OCS). Your OCS is designed to
resist electronic waves, but do not
place an electronic device such as
laptop computer on or near the seat
cushion since it may defeat the
proper functioning of the OCS.
(Continued)
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Condition detected by the occupant
classification system
1. Adult *
1
2. Infant *
2
or child restraint
system with 12 months old *
3
*
4
3. Unoccupied
4. Malfunction in the system
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
"PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator
light
SRS warning light
Front passenger
air bag
Indicator/Warning light Devices
*
1
The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the
front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her
physique and posture.
*
2
Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has
outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may rec-
ognize him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
*
3
Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*
4
The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12
months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger
seat. This is a normal condition.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the door or center
console.
- Never sit on one side of the front
passenger seat.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
OVQ036013N
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load, an active
electronic device or blanket in
the front passenger seat or seat-
back pocket.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
OVQ036014N
- Never place feet on the front pas-
senger seatback.
(Continued)
345
Safety features of your vehicle
When an adult is seated in the front pas-
senger seat, if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn the igni-
tion switch to the LOCK or OFF position
and ask the passenger to sit properly
(sitting upright with the seat back in an
upright position, centered on the seat
cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the
floor). Restart the engine and have the
person remain in that position. This will
allow the system to detect the person
and to enable the passenger air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indi-
cator is still on, ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat.
✽
NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF"
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position or after the engine is
started. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the occupant classification
sensor will then classify the front pas-
senger after several more seconds.
B990A01O
WARNING
Do not allow an adult passenger to
ride in the front seat when the PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
is illuminated because the air bag
will not deploy in the event of a
crash. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG
"OFF" indicator remains illuminat-
ed after the adult passenger reposi-
tions themselves properly and the
car is restarted, it is recommended
that passenger move to the rear
seat because the passenger's front
air bag will not deploy.
Front seat passengers must stay
properly seated to avoid serious
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING
Do not put a heavy load in the front
passenger seatback pocket or on
the front passenger seat. Do not
hang onto the front passenger seat.
Do not hang any items, such as a
seatback table, on the front passen-
ger seatback. Do not place feet on
the front passenger seatback. Do
not place any items under the front
passenger seat. Any of these could
interfere with proper sensor opera-
tion.
Proper position
Safety features of your vehicle
463
(Continued)
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag imme-
diately after deployment.
• The occupant classification sys-
tem may not work properly if
water, coffee or any other liquid
including rain gets on the seat.
Keep the front seat dry at all
times.
• Do not place an electronic device
such as a laptop computer on the
front passenger seat. Its electron-
ic field may cause the OCS to
switch to the "on" condition and
thus allow the passenger air bag
to deploy needlessly in a colli-
sion, increasing your repair
costs.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place any-
thing on or attach anything such
as a blanket or seat heater to the
front passenger seat. This can
adversely affect the occupant
classification system.
• Do not sit on sharp objects such
as tools when occupying the
front passenger seat. This can
adversely affect the occupant
classification system.
• Do not use accessory seat cov-
ers on the front seats.
• Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear, as opposed
to the front seat. It is recom-
mended that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including
an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a for-
ward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster
seat.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant clas-
sification system, never install a
child restraint system in the front
passenger's seat. A deploying air
bag can forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injuries or
death. Any child age 12 and
under should ride in the rear seat.
Children too large for child
restraints should use the avail-
able lap/shoulder belts. No mat-
ter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained
in the rear seat.
• If the PASSENGER AIR BAG
"OFF" indicator is illuminated
when the front passenger's seat
is occupied by an adult and
he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt
on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor), have
that person sit in the rear seat.
(Continued)
347
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
and passenger seating positions.
(Continued)
• The adult or child in the front pas-
senger’s seat who is not seated
correctly (for example: seat
excessively reclined, leaning on
the door or center console, or
hips shifted forward in the seat)
can cause a condition where the
occupant classification system
senses less field than if the occu-
pant were seated properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt
on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor).
This condition can result in an
adult potentially being misclassi-
fied as a child and illumination of
the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF"
indicator.
WARNING
If the occupant classification sys-
tem is not working properly, the
SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate
because the passenger's front air
bag is connected with the occupant
classification system. If there is a
malfunction of the occupant classi-
fication system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG "OFF" indicator will not
illuminate and the passenger's
front air bag will inflate in frontal
impact crashes even if there is no
occupant in the front passenger's
seat. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, remains illuminated after
approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect
the occupant classification system
and the SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
OFS031027
OFS031028
■ Driver’s front air bag
■ Passenger’s front air bag
Safety features of your vehicle
483
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "AIR BAG" engraved on the
air bag pad cover in the steering wheel
and the passenger's side front panel pad
above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors determine if
the driver and front passenger's seat
belts are fastened. These sensors pro-
vide the ability to control the SRS deploy-
ment based on whether or not the seat
belts are fastened, and how severe the
impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to
control the air bag inflation within two lev-
els. A first stage level is provided for mod-
erate-severity impacts. A second stage
level is provided for more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity and seat
belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS Control
Module) controls the air bag inflation.
Failure to properly wear seat belts can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
WARNING
If the occupant classification sys-
tem is not working properly, the
SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate
because the SRS air bag warning
light is connected with the occu-
pant classification system. If the
SRS air bag warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position,
remains illuminated after approxi-
mately 6 seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position,
or if it illuminates while the vehicle
is being driven, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the
advanced SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
349
Safety features of your vehicle
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant classification system in
the front passenger's seat. The occupant
classification system detects the pres-
ence of a passenger in the front passen-
ger's seat and will turn off the front pas-
senger's air bag under certain condi-
tions. For more detail, see "Occupant
classification system" in this section.
✽
NOTICE
• Be sure to read information about the
SRS on the labels provided on the sun
visor.
• Advanced air bags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-
vide enhanced occupant protection in
frontal crashes. Front air bags are not
intended to deploy in collisions in
which protection can be provided by
the pre-tensioner seat belt.
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with con-
siderable force and in the blink of
an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-
pants in proper position to obtain
maximum benefit from the air bag.
Even with air bags, improperly and
unbelted occupants can be severe-
ly injured when the air bag inflates.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occu-
pant safety contained in this manu-
al.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi-
mum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
• Front and side impact air bags
can injure occupants improperly
positioned in the front seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not place any objects under-
neath the front seats as they could
interfere with the occupant classifi-
cation system.
WARNING
If you are considering modification
of your vehicle due to a disability,
please contact the HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
503
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
• Never place covers, blankets or
seat warmers on the passenger
seat as these may interfere with
the occupant classification sys-
tem.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated or blinks
while the vehicle is being driven,
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer inspect the air bag system
as soon as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag imme-
diately after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitu-
dinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant clas-
sification system, do not install a
child restraint system in the front
passenger seat position. A child
restraint system must never be
placed in the front seat.The infant
or child could be severely injured
or killed by an air bag deployment
in case of an accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passen-
gers can be severely injured by
inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in an
upright position.
• Do not allow a passenger to ride
in the front seat when the pas-
senger’s front air bag OFF indica-
tor is illuminated, because the air
bag will not deploy in the event of
a moderate or severe frontal
crash.
(Continued)
351
Safety features of your vehicle
Side air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a side air
bag in each front seat. The purpose of
the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driv-
er and/or the front passenger with addi-
tional protection than that offered by the
seat belt alone.
(Continued)
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occu-
pant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
OFS031029
OFS032058N
(Continued)
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occu-
pants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-
sarily close to the air bag while
the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
523
The side air bags are designed to deploy
only during certain side-impact collisions,
depending on the crash severity, angle,
speed and point of impact. The side air
bags and curtain air bags on both sides
of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or
possible rollover is detected.
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations or
rollover situations.
(Continued)
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side impact
air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
impact air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side air bag that may
result in personal injury, avoid
impact to the side impact sensor
when the ignition switch is on.
• If the seat or seat cover is dam-
aged, have the vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer because your
vehicle is equipped with side air
bags and an occupant classifica-
tion system.
WARNING
• The side air bag is supplemental
to the driver's and the passen-
ger's seat belt systems and is not
a substitute for them. Therefore
your seat belts must be worn at
all times while the vehicle is in
motion. The air bags deploy only
in certain side impact conditions
severe enough to cause signifi-
cant injury to the vehicle occu-
pants.
• For best protection from the side
air bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position
with the seat belt properly fas-
tened. The driver's hands should
be placed on the steering wheel
at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions.
The passenger's arms and hands
should be placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors,
put their arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window, or
place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
353
Safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-
tain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and impact. The side air
bags and curtain air bags on both sides
of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or
possible rollover is detected. The curtain
air bags are not designed to deploy in all
side impact or rollover situation.
WARNING
• In order for side impact and cur-
tain air bags to provide the best
protection, both front seat occu-
pants and both outboard rear
occupants should sit in an
upright position with the seat
belts properly fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system. Make sure to
put the child restraint system as
far away from the door side as
possible, and secure the child
restraint system in a locked posi-
tion.
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle occu-
pants in an accident.
OMD030042
OFS032059N
Safety features of your vehicle
543
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expect-
ed to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side pressure impact sensor
OFS035030L/OFS031031/OFS035032L/OMD030039/OFS032060N
355
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensi-
ty, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B pillar
where side collision sensors are
installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing aftermarket bumper
guards or replacing a bumper
with non-genuine parts may
adversely affect your vehicles
collision and air bag deployment
performance.
OFS031040
Safety features of your vehicle
563
Side air bags
Side air bags (side impact and/or curtain
air bags) are designed to inflate when an
impact is detected by side collision sen-
sors depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side impact and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate only in
side impact collisions or rollover situa-
tions, but they may inflate in other colli-
sions if the side impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads
or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on sur-
faces not designed for vehicle traffic to
prevent unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
OFS031041
OFS032058N
OFS031042
357
Safety features of your vehicle
• Frontal air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case, inflat-
ed air bags would not be able to pro-
vide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side impact or curtain air
bags may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
• In a slant or angled collision, the force
of impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional bene-
fit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
OFS031043 OFS031044 OED036102
Safety features of your vehicle
583
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly reduced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Front air bags do not inflate in rollover
accidents. However, side and curtain
air bags may inflate in a rollover, when
it is detected by the rollover sensor.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the colli-
sion energy is absorbed by the vehicle
structure.
OFS031045 OED036104 OFS031048
359
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any
work on the steering wheel, the front
passenger's panel, front seats and roof
rails must be performed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of
the SRS system may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• Not only the modification of the
parts where the SRS sensors are
but also the modification of other
parts of the vehicle may affect the
SRS performance and lead to
possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, they must
be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and pro-
cedures could increase the risk
of personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on the
floor, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; have the car towed to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
603
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wear-
ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-
gency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between them-
selves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side impact air bag covers could inter-
fere with the proper operation of the air
bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side impact air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring har-
nesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and your feet on
the floor.
361
Safety features of your vehicle
Adding equipment to or modifying
your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required by
the Canada Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS), are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of poten-
tial risks of the air bag system.
OFS032061
OFS031033
Front
Side
4
Keys / 4-3
Smart key / 4-6
Remote keyless entry / 4-12
Theft-alarm system / 4-15
Door locks / 4-19
Tailgate / 4-24
Windows / 4-27
Hood / 4-31
Fuel filler lid / 4-33
Sunroof / 4-36
Steering wheel / 4-40
Mirrors / 4-45
Instrument cluster / 4-48
Rear parking assist system / 4-78
Rear view camera / 4-82
Hazard warning flasher / 4-82
Lighting / 4-83
Wipers and washers / 4-88
Interior light / 4-91
Defroster / 4-94
Manual climate control system / 4-95
Automatic climate control system / 4-104
Features of your vehicle
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-112
Storage compartments / 4-116
Interior features / 4-119
Audio system / 4-126
Features of your vehicle
4
43
Features of your vehicle
Record your key number
The key code number is
stamped or printed on
the key code tag
attached to the key set.
Should you lose your
keys, this number will enable an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer to duplicate the
keys easily. Remove the key code tag
and store it in a safe place. Also, record
the Key code number and keep it in a
safe place (not in the vehicle).
Key operations
Used to start the engine, lock and unlock
the doors.
KEYS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Ignition key
(Smart key)
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key (smart
key) is dangerous even if the key is
not in the ignition switch or the
engine start/stop button is ACC or
ON position. Children copy adults
and they could place the key in the
ignition switch or press the engine
start/stop button. The ignition key
(smart key) would enable children
to operate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in serious
bodily injury or even death. Never
leave the keys in your vehicle with
unsupervised children, when the
Engine is running.
WARNING
Use only HYUNDAI original parts
for the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return to
ON after START. If this happens, the
starter will continue to operate
causing damage to the starter
motor and possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
Features of your vehicle
44
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an elec-
tronic engine immobilizer system to
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle
use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the ignition key
and electronic devices inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies if the ignition
key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobilizer system activates auto-
matically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-
der and turn it to the ON position.
✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobilizer keys around.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each
key separate in order to avoid a starting
malfunction.
✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is designed
to give years of trouble-free service,
however you should avoid expo-
sure to moisture, static electricity
and rough handling. Immobilizer
system malfunction could occur.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave
this number anywhere in your vehi-
cle.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it
could cause the immobilizer sys-
tem to malfunction and should only
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the immobilizer system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may pre-
vent the engine from being started.
45
Features of your vehicle
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
"Limp Home" Mode and Related
Procedures
If the immobilizer warning indicator blinks
for five seconds when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, this indicates
the immobilizer system requires service.
The engine cannot be started without
using the procedure below.
The following procedure describes how
to start the engine using the limp home
function (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample pass-
word).
✽
NOTICE
You can get a limp home password when
the vehicle is first delivered to you. If
you do not have a password, consult
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
1.To activate the password, turn the igni-
tion key "ON" and "OFF" according to
the digit numbers.The immobilizer indi-
cator will blink along with the operation
of the ignition key. For example, turn
the ignition key once for digit number
"1", and twice for "2", and so on. For
the digit number "0", you must cycle
the ignition key 10 times.
2.Wait for 3~10 seconds.
3.You may set the remaining number of
digits by following steps 1 and 2.
4.If all of the four password digits have
been successfully entered, turn the
ignition key "ON" and check that the
immobilizer indicator illuminates. From
this time, you have to start your engine
within 30 seconds. If you try to start
your engine after 30 seconds, your
engine will not start.
✽
NOTICE
If the engine stalls while driving in the
"limp home" mode, you can start your
engine within 3 seconds without re-
entering the password.
If the immobilizer indicator blinks for five
seconds, you must re-enter the password
(steps 1~4).
After performing the limp home activation
procedure, consult with your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Features of your vehicle
64
Smart key function
1.Door lock
2.Door unlock
3.Tailgate unlock
4.Panic
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door (and tailgate) and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
Refer to the following for more details.
Locking
Using the door handle button
1.Close all doors, engine hood and tail-
gate.
2.Press the button of the outside door
handle.
3.The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4.Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
the vehicle or pulling the outside door
handle.
✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7~1m (28~40in.)
from the outside door handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for 3
seconds if any of following occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the tailgate is open.
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
OYF049213
WARNING - Smart key
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the smart key is dan-
gerous. Children copy adults and
they could press the engine
start/stop button. It would enable
children to operate power windows
or other controls, or even make the
vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even death.
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children.
OFS040008
47
Features of your vehicle
Using the button on the smart key
1 Close all doors, engine hood and tail-
gate.
2.Press the lock button(1).
3.The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4.Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside or
pulling the outside door handle.
Unlocking
Using the door handle
1.Press the button of the driver's outside
door handle.
2.The driver’s door will unlock. The haz-
ard warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
3.Press the button once more within 4
seconds.
4.All doors will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink and the chime
will sound two times.
❈ If you press the button of the front pas-
senger’s outside door handle while
carrying the smart key, all doors will
unlock. (if equipped)
✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7~1m (28~40in.)
from the outside door handle.
• When the smart key is recognized in
the area of 0.7~1m (28~40in.) from the
front outside door handle, other peo-
ple can also open the doors.
• After unlocking the driver’s door or
all doors, the door(s) will lock auto-
matically unless the door is opened.
Using the button on the smart key
1.Press the unlock button (2) of the
smart key.
2.The driver’s door will unlock. The haz-
ard warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
3.Press the unlock button (2) once more
within 4 seconds.
4.All doors will unlock. The hazard warn-
ing lights will blink and the chime will
sound two times.
✽
NOTICE
After pressing the button, the doors will
lock automatically unless any door is
opened.
Features of your vehicle
84
Tailgate unlocking
Using the tailgate handle button
1.Carry the smart key.
2.Press the tailgate handle button.
3.When all doors are locked, the hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally.
✽
NOTICE
The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7~1m (28~40in.)
from the tailgate handle.
Using the button on the smart key
1.Press the tailgate unlock button(3) for
more than 1 second.
2.When all doors are locked, the hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
Panic
1.Press the panic button(4) for more than
1.5 second.
2.The horn sounds and hazard warning
light flash for about 30 seconds.
✽
NOTICE
To stop the horn and lights, press any
button on the smart key.
Start-up
You can start the engine without inserting
the key. For detailed information refer to
the “Engine start/stop button” in section 5.
Loss of the smart key
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be reg-
istered to a single vehicle.
If you happen to lose your smart key, you
will not be able to start the engine. You
should immediately take the vehicle and
remaining key to your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer(tow the vehicle, if nec-
essary) to protect it from potential theft.
Smart key precautions
• The smart key will not work if any of
the following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work cor-
rectly, open and close the door with the
mechanical key and contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proximity to
your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the smart key could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone is
active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or send-
ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing the
smart key and your cell phone or smart
phone in the same pants or jacket
pocket and maintain adequate dis-
tance between the two devices.
49
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an electron-
ic engine immobilizer system to reduce
the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the smart key and
electronic devices inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position by pressing the button
while carrying the smart key, it checks
and determines and verifies if the smart
key is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Turn the engine start/stop button to the
ON position by pressing the button while
carrying the smart key.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to the
OFF position. The immobilizer system
activates automatically. Without a valid
smart key for your vehicle, the engine will
not start.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave
this number anywhere in your vehi-
cle.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or other liquids,
it will not be covered by your manu-
facturer’s vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
104
✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobilizer keys around.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each
key separate in order to avoid a starting
malfunction.
✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
The transponder in your smart key
is an important part of the immobi-
lizer system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, how-
ever you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and
rough handling. Immobilizer sys-
tem malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it
could cause the immobilizer sys-
tem to malfunction and should only
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the immobilizer system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the smart key.
The engine may not start because
the metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from trans-
mitting normally.
411
Features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for sever-
al years, but if the smart key is not work-
ing properly, try replacing the battery with
a new one. If you are unsure how to use
your smart key or replace the battery,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
The circuit inside the smart key can
have a problem if exposed to moisture
or static electricity. If you are unsure
how to use your smart key or replace the
battery, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart
key.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
CAUTION
• The smart key is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the smart key to malfunc-
tion. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose
it to heat or sunlight.
WARNING
An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
OBH048004
IC WARNING
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s).
Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Features of your vehicle
124
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button is
pressed. If all doors, tailgate and hood are
closed, the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that all doors are locked.
Also, if the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard warn-
ing lights will blink and the horn will sound
once to confirm that the door is locked.
However, if any door, tailgate lid or
engine hood remains open, the hazard
warning lights (and/or the horn) will not
operate. But if all doors, tailgate lid and
engine hood are closed after the lock
button is pressed, the hazard warning
lights will blink once.
Unlock (2)
Driver's door is unlocked if the unlock
button is pressed once. The hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the driver's door is unlocked. All
doors are unlocked if the unlock button is
pressed twice within 4 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
again to indicate that all doors are
unlocked. If no doors are opened within
30 seconds after unlocking them, the
doors will automatically lock again.
✽
NOTICE - Unlock mode conversion
(if equipped)
You can change the system to unlock all
doors by one pressing the unlock button
on the transmitter. If you want this fea-
ture (central door unlock mode), per-
form the following:
two stage unlock mode
↔
central door
unlock mode
The unlock mode is changed alternately
by pressing the lock button and unlock
button on the transmitter at the same time
for 5 seconds or more. The hazard warn-
ing lights will blink four times to indicate
that the mode conversion is completed.
Tailgate unlock (3)
The tailgate is unlocked if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will be locked
automatically.
Panic (4)
The horn sounds and hazard warning
lights flash for about 30 seconds if this
button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec-
ond. To stop the horn and lights, press
any button except the tailgate button on
the transmitter
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
ONF048011
413
Features of your vehicle
Transmitter precautions
✽
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or send-
ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
144
Battery replacement
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat-
tery which will normally last for several
years. When replacement is necessary,
use the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently
pry open the transmitter center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for transmit-
ter reprogramming.
CAUTION
• The transmitter is designed to
give you years of trouble-free
use, however it can malfunction if
exposed to moisture or static
electricity. If you are unsure how
to use your transmitter or replace
the battery, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or
expose it to heat or sunlight.
WARNING
An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
ONF048120
IC WARNING
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s).
Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of
the device.
415
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
This system is designed to provide pro-
tection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-
gered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Armed stage
Using the smart key (if equipped)
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Make sure that all doors, the engine
hood and tailgate lid are closed and
latched.
3.
• Lock the doors by pressing the button of
the front outside door handle with the
smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps above, the
hazard warning lights and chime will
operate once to indicate that the system
is armed.
If any door remains open, the doors won't
lock and the chime will sound for 3 sec-
onds. Close the door and try again to lock
the doors.
If tailgate lid or engine hood remains
open, the hazard warning lights and
chime won't operate and theft-alarm will
not arm. After you close the tailgate lid
and engine hood, the hazard warning
lights blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the lock but-
ton on the smart key.
After completion of the steps above, the
hazard warning lights and chime will
operate once to indicate that the system
is armed.
If any door, tailgate lid or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning lights
and chime won't operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. After you close the tailgate
lid and engine hood, the hazard warning
lights blink once.
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
Features of your vehicle
164
Using the transmitter (if equipped)
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine and remove the
ignition key from the ignition switch.
2.Make sure that all doors, the engine
hood and tailgate lid are closed and
latched.
3.Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the transmitter.
After completion of the steps above, the
hazard warning lights will blink once to
indicate that the system is armed. If the
lock button is pressed once more within 4
seconds, hazard warning lights blink and
the horn sounds once to confirm that the
system is armed.
If any door, tailgate lid or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning lights
(or/and horn) won't operate and theft-
alarm will not arm. After you close all
doors, tailgate lid and engine hood, the
hazard warning lights blink once.
Using the mechanical key
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch(if equipped).
2.Make sure that all doors, the engine
hood and tailgate lid are closed and
latched.
3.Lock the doors by inserting the key into
the key hole on the front outside door
handle and turning the key toward the
front of the vehicle.
If any door, tailgate lid or engine hood
remains open, the theft-alarm will not
arm.
✽
NOTICE
If you lock or unlock the doors by using
the mechanical key, the hazard warning
light won't operate.
Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passenger(s)
remains in the vehicle, the alarm may
be activated when the remaining pas-
senger(s) leave the vehicle. If any
door (or tailgate) or engine hood is
opened within 30 seconds after the
system enters the armed stage, the
system is disarmed to prevent an
unnecessary alarm.
417
Features of your vehicle
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A door is opened without using the
transmitter (or smart key or mechani-
cal key).
• The tailgate is opened without using
the transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
approximately 30 seconds. The alarm will
repeat once more unless the system is
disarmed. To turn off the system, unlock
the doors with the mechanical key or
transmitter or smart key.
Opening the tailgate with the
alarm armed (if equipped)
When the alarm is armed, the alarm will
not sound if the tailgate lid is opened with
the transmitter (or smart key).
Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate will be locked auto-
matically and the system will be armed
again.
Also, if any of the doors or hood is
opened while the tailgate lid is open and
the alarm is armed, the alarm will sound.
Disarmed stage
Using the smart key (if equipped)
The system will be disarmed when the
doors are unlocked by pressing the
unlock button on the smart key or press-
ing the lock/unlock button of the front out-
side door handle with the smart key in
your possession.
After unlocking the doors, the hazard
warning lights and chime will operate
twice to indicate that the system is dis-
armed.
After unlocking the doors, if any door is
not opened within 30 seconds, the sys-
tem will be rearmed.
Using the transmitter (if equipped)
The system will be disarmed when the
doors are unlocked by pressing the
unlock button on the transmitter.
After unlocking the doors, the hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.
After unlocking the doors, if any door is
not opened within 30 seconds, the sys-
tem will be rearmed.
Features of your vehicle
184
Using the mechanical key
The system will be disarmed when the
doors are unlocked with the mechanical
key.
✽
NOTICE
If you lock or unlock the doors by using
the mechanical key, the hazard warning
light and chime sound won't operate.
✽
NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starting motor is disabled during the
theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch, turn the ignition
switch to the ON position and wait for
30 seconds. Then the system will be
disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction and should only be
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
419
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from out-
side the vehicle
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the front
of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock the door with a key, all vehi-
cle doors will lock automatically.
(if equipped)
• From the driver’s door, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle once to
unlock the driver’s door and once more
within 4 seconds to unlock all doors.
(if equipped)
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter (or smart
key).
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that the doors are
closed securely.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door locks
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
✽
NOTICE - Unlock mode conversion
(if equipped)
You can change the system to unlock all
doors by turning the key to the right once.
If you want this feature (central door
unlock mode), perform the following:
two stage unlock mode
↔
central door
unlock mode
The unlock mode is changed alternately
by pressing the lock button and unlock
button on the transmitter at the same time
for 4 seconds or more. The hazard warn-
ing lights will blink four times to indicate
that the mode conversion is completed.
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING
• If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
• Be careful that someone's body
and hands are not trapped when
closing the door.
OFS040009
Unlock
Lock
Features of your vehicle
204
In case of an emergency
If the power door lock switch does not
operate electrically, the only way to lock
the door(s) is with the ignition key from
the outside key hole.
Doors without the outside key hole, you
can lock the door as follows:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock doors by pushing each lock but-
ton.
3. Close the door securely.
Once the tailgate is closed when the
power door lock switch does not operate
electrically, you will not be able to open
the tailgate.
✽
NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key, engage
the parking brake, close all windows
and lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended.
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on the button will be visi-
ble.
• To lock a door, push the door lock but-
ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the button will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
• If the inner door handle on either front
door is pulled when the door lock but-
ton is in the locked position, the door
will unlock and open.
• Front door cannot be locked if the igni-
tion key is in the ignition switch and the
door is open.
• A door cannot be locked if the smart
key is in the vehicle and any door is
open.
WARNING - Door lock mal-
function
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehi-
cle, try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
OFS040011
421
Features of your vehicle
With central door lock switch
Operate by depressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pushing down on the front por-
tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear por-
tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch and
front door is open, the doors will not
lock even though the front portion (1)
of central door lock switch is pressed.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle and
any door is open, the doors will not
lock even though the front portion(1) of
central door lock switch is pressed.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehi-
cle is in motion to prevent acci-
dental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
OFS040012
OFS042223N
■ Driver side
■ Passenger side
Features of your vehicle
224
Impact sensing door unlock system
(if equipped)
All doors will be automatically unlocked
when the impact is delivered to impact
sensors while the ignition switch is ON.
However, the doors may not be unlocked
if mechanical problems occur with the
door lock system or battery.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically lock after the
vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h.
For deactivation of this feature, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Turn the child safety lock located on
the rear edge of the door to the lock
( ) position (1). When the child safe-
ty lock is in the lock position, the rear
door will not open even though the
inner door handle is pulled.
OFS040013
423
Features of your vehicle
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle (2).
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle until the rear door child
safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out of the
vehicle, resulting in severe injury or
death. To prevent children from
opening the rear doors from the
inside, the rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
244
Opening the tailgate
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the key, transmitter, smart key or
central door lock/unlock switch.
• When all doors are locked and the tail-
gate unlock button on the smart key is
pressed for more than 1 second, the
tailgate will unlock. Once the tailgate is
opened and then closed, the tailgate is
locked automatically.
If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle and pulling it
up.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates door lock and
door mechanisms may not work prop-
erly due to freezing conditions.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle, do
not operate the tailgate. This could
cause the tailgate to close improperly.
TAILGATE
OFS040014
WARNING
• Do not put any object on the cov-
ering shelf. If the vehicle sudden-
ly stops or makes a curve, the
object may injure passengers.
• Watch out for the edge of the cov-
ering shelf, when you are using
the luggage room. You may injure
yourself.
• While operating the engine or
when you turn off the engine, be
careful not to damage when you
open the tailgate. The bumper
may be heated by exhaust gas.
CAUTION
Do not put any heavy object on the
covering shelf. It may damage the
covering shelf.
425
Features of your vehicle
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that
the tailgate is securely latched.
Emergency tailgate safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-
gency tailgate safety release located on
the bottom of the tailgate. When some-
one is inadvertently locked in the lug-
gage compartment, the tailgate can be
opened by inserting the key or screw
driver to hole and pushing the tailgate.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate open,
you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle which can
cause serious injury or death to
vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
open, keep the air vents and all win-
dows open so that additional out-
side air comes into the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
OFS040015
OFS040016
Features of your vehicle
264
Shelf disassembly and install-
ment
1. Disassemble the wires(1) connected
to left and right fixed hook.
2. Push the shelf(2) up and disassemble
the shelf.
3. To install the shelf, push the shelf
down at original position and fix the
wire to position(1)
WARNING
• For emergency, be fully aware of
the location of the emergency
tailgate safety release lever in
this vehicle and how to open the
tailgate if you are accidentally
locked in the luggage compart-
ment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment
of the vehicle at any time. The
luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
• Use the emergency tailgate safe-
ty release for emergency only.
Use extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
OFS031049
CAUTION
When you close the tailgate, check
the shelf position. Be careful not to
collide the shelf and tailgate. If not,
the shelf may be damaged.
427
Features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
(3) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(4) Window opening and closing
(5) Automatic power window*
(6) Power window lock switch*
* if equipped
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OFS040017
Features of your vehicle
284
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door's window. The driv-
er has a master power window switch
that controls all the windows in the vehi-
cle. Also, a power window lock switch
which that can block the operation of rear
passenger windows. The power windows
can be operated for approximately 30
seconds after the ignition key is removed
or turned to the ACC or LOCK position.
However, if the front doors are opened,
the power windows cannot be operated
within the 30 seconds period.
✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
opened (or partially opened), your vehicle
may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pul-
sation noise. This noise is a normal occur-
rence and can be reduced or eliminated by
taking the following actions. If the noise
occurs with the rear windows down, par-
tially lower both front windows approxi-
mately one inch. If you experience the
noise with the sunroof open, slightly
reduce the size of the sunroof opening
Window opening and closing
Type A
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corre-
sponding switch to the first detent posi-
tion (4).
Type B - Auto down window (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent posi-
tion (6) completely lowers the window
even when the switch is released. To stop
the window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up the
switch momentarily to the opposite direc-
tion of the window movement.
OLM049022
■ Type B
OFS040018
■ Type A
429
Features of your vehicle
Type C - Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (5) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or press down and
release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power window
system must be reset as follows:
1.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the window and continue pulling
up the power window switch for at
least 1 second after the window is
completely closed.
Automatic reversal (if equipped)
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approxi-
mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for the
window is only active when the “auto
up” feature is used by fully pulling up
the switch. The automatic reverse fea-
ture will not operate if the window is
raised using the halfway position on the
power window switch.
OFS040019
■ Type C
OFS032063N
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resist-
ance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
Features of your vehicle
304
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power window
switches on the front and rear passen-
gers' doors by pressing the power window
lock switch to lock position (pressed).
When the power window lock switch
is pressed, the driver's master control
cannot operate the front and rear pas-
sengers' power windows.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren, when the Engine is running.
• NEVER leave any child unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entan-
gle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a win-
dow.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(depressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend any head or arms
outside through the window
opening while driving.
OFS040020
431
Features of your vehicle
Opening the hood
1.Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
2.Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, pull the secondary latch
(1) inside of the hood center and lift the
hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will raise completely
by itself after it has been raised
halfway.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-
lowing:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push it
down. Make sure the hood is locked
securely.
HOOD
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting
the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion for automatic transaxle/
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission
and to the 1st (First) gear or R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle, and
setting the parking brake.
OFS040021
OFS045022L
Features of your vehicle
324
WARNING
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood in the raised position, as
vision is obstructed and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
433
Features of your vehicle
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pulling the fuel filler
lid opener switch.
✽
NOTICE
If the fuel filler lid will not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or
push on the lid to break the ice and
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If
necessary, spray around the lid with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use radi-
ator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel
filler lid opener switch.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank
cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks one time. This indicates that
the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it in
lightly making sure that it is securely
closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
OFS043224N
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the fuel cap open
warning light will illuminate.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
OFS040024
Features of your vehicle
344
(Continued)
Use only approved portable plas-
tic fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cel-
lular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fab-
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static elec-
tricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-
line source.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
(Continued)
WARNING - Refueling dan-
gers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines care-
fully. Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facility.
• Before refueling, note the loca-
tion of the Emergency Gasoline
Shut-Off, if available, at the gas
station facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
435
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refuel-
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-
cle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire depart-
ment. Follow any safety instruc-
tions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel require-
ments" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
Features of your vehicle
364
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the over-
head console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
• After a vehicle is washed or in a rain-
storm be sure to wipe off any water that
is on the sunroof before operating it.
✽
NOTICE
The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in the
slide position but can slide while in a tilt
position.
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OFS040026
CAUTION
• Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sun-
roof is fully opened, closed, or tilt-
ed. Damage to the motor or sys-
tem components could occur.
• Make sure the sunroof is closed
fully when leaving your vehicle. If
the sunroof is open, rain or snow
may leak through the sunroof and
wet the interior as well as cause
theft.
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or roller
blind while driving. This could result
in loss of control and an accident
that may cause death, serious injury,
or property damage.
437
Features of your vehicle
Sliding the sunroof
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the sunshade.
To open or close the sunroof (manual
slide feature), pull or push the sunroof
control lever backward or forward.
To open the sunroof automatically:
Pull the sunroof control lever backward to
the second detent and then release it.
The sunroof will automatically slide open
all the way.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
To close the sunroof ;
Pull the sunroof control lever forward until
the sunroof is closed.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detect-
ed while the sunshade is closing auto-
matically, it will reverse the direction, and
then stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sunroof
sash. You should always check that all
passengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
OFS042027N OFS040028
Features of your vehicle
384
Tilting the sunroof
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the sunshade.
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever upward.
To close the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever forward until the sunroof
moves to the desired position.
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass with the
sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever forward
until the sunroof is closed.
After the sunroof is closed, push the sun-
roof control lever forward to close the
sunshade automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
OFS040029
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed by
a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof
while driving.
• Make sure your hands and head
are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof when
the temperature is below freezing
or when the sunroof is covered
with snow or ice, the glass or the
motor could be damaged.
• While using sunroof for a long
time, a dust between sunroof and
roof panel can make a noise.
Open the sunroof and remove
regularly the dust using clean
cloth.
439
Features of your vehicle
Sunshade
The sunshade will automatically open,
when you push the sunroof control lever
backward to the first detent and then
release it.
The sunshade will automatically close,
when you push the sunroof control lever
forward and then release it.
✽
NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on the
blind because of its material character-
istic.
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the fol-
lowings)
- Battery is discharged or disconnected
or the related fuse has been replaced
or disconnected.
- The one-touch sliding function of the
sunroof does not normally operate.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the sunroof.
3. Release the sunroof control lever.
4. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close (about 10 sec-
onds) until the sunroof and sunshade
move a little. Then, release the lever.
Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close until the sun-
roof operetes as follows:
SUNSHADE OPEN → TILT OPEN →
SLIDE OPEN → SLIDE CLOSE →
SUNSHADE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof sys-
tem has been reset.
OFS040030
Features of your vehicle
404
Electric power steering (EPS)
The power steering uses a motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If the
engine is off or if the power steering sys-
tem becomes inoperative, the vehicle
may still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is con-
trolled by a power steering control unit
which senses the steering wheel torque
and vehicle speed to command the
motor.
The steering effort increases as the vehi-
cle’s speed increases and the effort
decreases as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for optimum steering control.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steer-
ing checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur dur-
ing normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not illu-
minate when turning the ignition to
the ON position.
• The steering gets effort increases after
turning the ignition switch on. This
happens as the system performs the
EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics is completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condi-
tion.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK (OFF)
position.
• A motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• If the Electric Power Steering System
does not operate normally, the warning
light will illuminate on the instrument
cluster. The steering wheel may
become difficult to control or operate
abnormally. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)
STEERING WHEEL
CAUTION
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normal-
ly, the warning light will illuminate
on the instrument cluster. The
steering wheel may become diffi-
cult to control or operate abnor-
mally. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperatures, an
abnormal noise could occur. If
temperature rises, the noise will
disappear. This is a normal condi-
tion.
• When the vehicle is stationary, if
you turn the steering wheel all the
way to the left or right repeatedly,
the steering wheel assist may
temporarily be reduced, not a
system malfunction. As time
passes. The steering wheel return
to normal operation.
441
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When you operate the steering wheel in
low temperature, abnormal noise could
occur. If temperature rises, the noise will
disappear. This is a normal condition.
• When the charging system warning
light comes on or the voltage is low
(When the alternator (or battery) does
not operate normally or it malfunc-
tions), the steering effort may increase
and may become difficult to control
normal.
Tilt steering / Tilt and telescope
steering
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You can
also raise it to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust the
steering wheel to the desired angle (2)
and height (3), then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock the steering wheel in
place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel
to the desired position before driving.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of the
steering wheel while driving. You
may lose steering control and
cause severe personal injury,
death or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
OFS040031
Features of your vehicle
424
Flex steering wheel
(if equipped)
The flex steering wheel controls steering
effort as driver's preference or road con-
dition.
You can select the desired steering mode
by pressing the steering mode button.
When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode will
appear on the LCD display.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode will
change as above pictures.
If the steering wheel mode button is not
pressed for about 4 seconds, the LCD dis-
play will change to the previous screen.
Normal mode
The normal mode offers medium steer-
ing effort.
OFS043225
OFS043233
■ For Type B cluster
OFS045304K
■ For Type C cluster
OFS043228
■ For Type B cluster
OFS045301K
■ For Type C cluster
443
Features of your vehicle
Sport mode
The steering wheel becomes heavier.
The sport mode is usually used when
driving in highway.
Comfort mode
The steering wheel becomes lighter. The
comfort mode is usually used when driv-
ing in downtown or parking the vehicle.
Also, the comfort mode helps weak peo-
ple to drive easily.
OFS043229
■ For Type B cluster
OFS045302K
■ For Type C cluster
OFS043227
■ For Type B cluster
OFS045303K
■ For Type C cluster
CAUTION
• For your safety, if you press the
steering mode button while oper-
ating the steering wheel, the LCD
display will change, but the steer-
ing effort will not change immedi-
ately. After operating the steering
wheel, the steering effort will
change automatically to the
selected mode.
• Be careful when changing the
steering mode while driving.
• When the electronic power steer-
ing is not working properly, the
flex steering wheel will not work.
Features of your vehicle
444
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, pressing the heated steering
wheel button warms the steering wheel.
The indicator on the button will illuminate.
To turn the steering wheel off, press the
button once again. The indicator on the
button will turn off.
It will turn off automatically approximate-
ly 30 minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
If you turn on the ignition again after turn
off your engine in half an hour (after oper-
ating heater button), the heating system
will be maintained in its 'on' condition.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indi-
cated by the horn symbol on your steer-
ing wheel (see illustration). The horn will
operate only when this area is pressed.
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharp-
pointed object.
OFS040032OFS043226L
CAUTION
• Do not install any grip to operate
the steering wheel. This causes
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated steer-
ing wheel, do not use an organic
solvent such as paint thinner,
benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
Doing so may damage the sur-
face of the steering wheel.
• If the surface of the steering
wheel is damaged by a sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components could
occur.
445
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window is
seen. Make this adjustment before you
start driving.
Day/night rearview mirror
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of the
vehicles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The mir-
ror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision through
the rear window.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
OAM049023
Day
Night
WARNING - Rearview mir-
rors
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
Features of your vehicle
464
Remote control
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, the
ignition switch should be in the ACC or
ON position, or engine is running. Push
the switch (1) to R or L to select the right
side mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point on the mirror
adjustment control to position the select-
ed mirror up, down, left or right.
After the adjustment, put the switch into
the neutral (center) position to prevent
inadvertent adjustment.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with warm
water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-
ator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
OFS040034
447
Features of your vehicle
Folding the outside rearview mirror
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
1LDA2083A
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch is
pressed. Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the mirror.
Features of your vehicle
484
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
OFS045332C/OFS045333C
■ Type A
■ Type B
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Warning and indicator lights
5. Engine temperature gauge
6. Fuel gauge
7. Odometer/Tripmeter*/LCD Display*
* if equipped
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
449
Features of your vehicle
OFS045334C
■ Type C
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Warning and indicator lights
5. Engine temperature gauge
6. Fuel gauge
7. Odometer/Tripmeter*/LCD Display*
* if equipped
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Features of your vehicle
504
Instrument panel illumination
(if equipped)
Press the illumination control switch to
adjust the instrument panel illumination
intensity.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of
the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-
ters per hour and/or miles per hour.
OFS040038
OFS045328C
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045039E
OFS045325C
■ Type A
451
Features of your vehicle
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approxi-
mate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
When the door is open, or if the engine is
not started within 1 minute, the tachome-
ter pointer may move slightly in ON posi-
tion with the engine OFF. This movement
is normal and will not affect the accuracy
of the tachometer once the engine is run-
ning.
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine dam-
age.
OFS045329L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045041L
OFS045042L
■ Type A
OFS040043
OFS045330E
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C
Features of your vehicle
524
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
The fuel tank capacity is given in
section 8.
The fuel gauge is supplement-
ed by a low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is near
empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light
may come on earlier than usual due to
the movement of fuel in the tank.
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
E level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
CAUTION
If the gauge moves beyond the nor-
mal range area toward the “H” posi-
tion, it indicates overheating that
may damage the engine.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OFS040044
OFS045331E
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C
453
Features of your vehicle
Odometer (km or mi.)
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputer
controlling the driver information system.
It displays information related to driving
on the LCD screen when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. If the battery
is disconnected, then all stored driving
information (except odometer) is reset.
■ Trip Modes
(For Type A and B cluster)
Press the TRIP button for less than 1
second to select any mode as follows:
OFS040045
OFS042140L
OFS045360L
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C
* if equipped
Tripmeter B
Instant fuel consumption
Tripmeter A
Distance to empty
Average fuel consumption
Elapsed time
Average speed
Distance to service*
User setting*
Features of your vehicle
544
■ Trip Modes
(For Type C cluster)
Press the TRIP button for less than 1
second to select any mode as follows:
Tripmeter (mi. or km)
TRIP A : Tripmeter A
TRIP B : Tripmeter B
This mode indicates the distance of indi-
vidual trips selected since the last trip-
meter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
999.9 km (0.0 to 999.9 miles).
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the tripmeter (TRIP
A or TRIP B) is being displayed, clears
the tripmeter to zero (0.0).
Average speed (km/h or MPH)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps changing while the
engine is running.
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the average speed
is being displayed, clears the average
speed to zero (---).
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
Service Mode
User settings Mode
FUEL ECONOMY
OFS042141L
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045361C
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045361C
OFS042048C
455
Features of your vehicle
Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time trav-
eled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps increasing while the
engine is running.
The meter’s working range is from
00:00~99:59.
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the driving time is
being displayed, clears the driving time to
zero (00:00).
Distance to empty (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 50 km (30
miles), “---” will be displayed and the dis-
tance to empty indicator will blink.
The meter’s working range is from 1 to
9,999 km (1 to 9,999 miles).
Average fuel economy (if equipped)
(L/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average econ-
omy reset. The total fuel used is calculat-
ed from the fuel consumption input. For
an accurate calculation, drive more than
50 m (0.03 miles).
Pressing the RESET button for more than
1 second, when the average fuel econo-
my is being displayed, clears the average
fuel consumption to zero (----).
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045361C
OFS042142N/OFS042142C
OFS042046C
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045363C
OFS042047C
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045363C
Features of your vehicle
564
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1km/h (1.6
MPH) after being refueled with more than
6 l (1.6 gallons), the average fuel econo-
my will be cleared to zero (----).
Instant fuel consumption
(if equipped) (L/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the instant fuel
consumption of the last few seconds.
✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the "Distance to empty" function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-
cle.
• The fuel consumption and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an esti-
mate of the available driving distance.
This may differ from the actual driv-
ing distance available.
OFS042143L
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045363C
457
Features of your vehicle
Distance to service (if equipped)
After selecting the maintenance of
engine oil, if service is required, a corre-
sponding message will be displayed.
Maintenance (if equipped)
1. When the vehicle is at a standstill,
pressing the TRIP button for more
than 2 seconds with the ENGINE
START/ STOP button in the ON posi-
tion or engine running, the LCD dis-
play on the cluster will change to the
"User Setting" mode.
You can move to the items by pressing
the TRIP button and select the item by
pressing the RESET button.
2. In the "User Setting" mode select
"Maintenance".
3. Select the desired maintenance
schedule.
4. If finished, you can come out of the
Maintenance mode by pressing the
TRIP button for more than 2 seconds.
✽
NOTICE
If service is required, "Engine oil service
required" message will be displayed.
If you would like to reset or inactivate
the maintenance system, press the reset
button.
The display will change to "Oil Service
Message" mode.
You can move to items by pressing the
TRIP button and select the desired items
by pressing the RESET button.
OFS042144C
■ Type B
OFS042161L
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
584
Service Mode (if equipped)
Service in
It calculates and displays when you need
a scheduled maintenance service
(mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time reaches
1,500 km (900 mi) or 30 days, "Service
in" message is displayed for several sec-
onds each time you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to the
ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serviced
according to the already inputted service
interval, “Service required” message is
displayed for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
To reset the service interval to the mileage
and days you inputted before:
Press the RESET button for more than 1
second.
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set, “Service
in OFF” message is displayed on the
LCD display.
✽
NOTICE
If any of the following conditions occurs,
the mileage and days may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
OFS045380L
■ Type C
OFS045381L
■ Type C
OFS045382L
■ Type C
459
Features of your vehicle
User settings mode (if equipped)
When the vehicle is at a standstill, press-
ing the TRIP button for more than 2 sec-
onds with the engine start/stop button in
the ON position or engine running, the
LCD screen on the cluster will change to
the vehicle setting mode.
You can change the item by pressing the
TRIP button and choose the item by
pressing the RESET button.
Auto door lock (if equipped)
Off - The auto door lock operation will be
canceled.
Speed - All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 20 km/h (12.4 mph).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally locked if the shift lever
is shifted from the P (Park)
position to the R (Reverse),
N (Neutral) or D (Drive)
position.
Auto door unlock (if equipped)
Off - The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
Key Out - All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key
is removed from ignition switch
(or smart key is removed from
the smart key holder).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally unlocked if the shift
lever is shifted to the
P(Park) position.
Headlamp escort
On - If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACC or OFF position with the head-
lamp ON, the headlamp remain on
for about 20 minutes. And the head
lamp welcome operation will be
activated. Refer to the [LIGHTING]
in this chapter.
Off - The headlamp escort and head-
lamp welcome operation will be
canceled.
Auto Triple Turn (One-touch triple turn
signal) (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the lane change
signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times when the
turn signal lever is moved slightly.
OFS042160L/OFS045365L
■ Type B
■ Type C
Features of your vehicle
604
AVG fuel economy
Off (Disable) - The average fuel econo-
my will reset when the
RESET button presses for
more than 1 second.
After ignition - The average fuel economy
will reset automatically when
the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the OFF position during
4 hours.
After refueling - The average fuel econo-
my will rest automatically
when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1km/h after refu-
eling 6L or more.
Oil service Message
When a notification message is dis-
played on LCD screen, press the RESET
button to go to the notification settings
screen.
Off - Alarm function will be canceled.
Complete Reset - The notification period
will be reset to the pre-
vious settings.
Remind Later - The notification function
will be suspended tem-
porarily.
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the serv-
ice interval function with mileage (km or
mi.) and period (months).
Off - The service interval function will be
deactivated.
On - You can set the service interval
(mileage and months).
461
Features of your vehicle
Warnings and indicators
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off. The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
ECO indicator
(if equipped)
Active ECO system (if equipped)
When the active ECO is operating the
ECO indicator is green.
For more detailed information, refer to
“Active ECO” in chapter 5.
Air bag warning light
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
This light also comes on when the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is
not working properly. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not come on, or
continuously remains on after operating
for about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or start-
ed the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, have the SRS inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ECO
Features of your vehicle
624
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned ON and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-
ing normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a malfunction with the
ABS.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but with-
out the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.
If the ABS warning light turns on while
driving
1.Park the vehicle in a safe place and
turn off the engine.
2.Turn on the engine again.
3.If the warning light illuminates and
turns off in approximately 3 seconds,
the system is operating normally.
If the warning light does not turn off, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
Electronic brake force distri-
bution (EBD) system warning
light
If these two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving, your vehicle
may have a malfunction with the ABS
and EBD system.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
If the both ABS and brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-
cle’s brake system will not work
normally during sudden braking. In
this case, avoid high speed driving
and abrupt braking. Have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
463
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-
ing light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. In this case, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
Seat belt warning
The driver's seat belt warning light and
chime will activate to the following table
when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.
*
1
Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
interval 24 seconds. If the driver's seat
belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6
seconds and chime will stop immediately.
*
2
The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
Turn signal indicator
The blinking arrows on the instrument
panel show the direction indicated by the
turn signals. If the arrow comes on but
does not blink, blinks more rapidly than
normal, or does not illuminate at all, a
malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. Your dealer should be consult-
ed for repairs.
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Chime-
Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 5 km/h
(3 mph)
6 seconds None
5 km/h~
10 km/h
6 seconds
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
↓
Below 5 km/h
(3 mph)
6 seconds *
1
↓
Stop *
2
Features of your vehicle
644
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Tail light indicator
This indicator illuminates when the tail
lights are on.
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped imme-
diately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer before
the car is driven again.
465
Features of your vehicle
Parking brake & brake fluid
warning light
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have the vehicle towed to any author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake sys-
tem inspection and necessary repairs.
Your vehicle is equipped with a dual-
diagonal braking system.This means you
still have braking on two wheels even if
one of the brake circuits is damaged or
malfunctions. With only one of the circuits
working, more than normal pedal travel
and greater pedal pressure are required
to stop the car. Also, the car will not stop
in as short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working. If the
brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a
lower gear for additional engine braking
and stop the car as soon as it is safe to
do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
Low tire pressure telltale
(if equipped)
The low tire pressure telltale illuminates
when one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly underinflated.
Inflate your tires to the correct inflation
pressure.
The low tire pressure telltale will illumi-
nate after it blinks for approximately one
minute when there is a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If this occurs, have the system checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
For details, refer to the TPMS on chapter 6.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, have the
brakes checked and repaired imme-
diately by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING - Low tire pres-
sure
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and can
contribute to loss of vehicle control
and increased braking distances.
Continued driving on tires with low
pressure will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
Features of your vehicle
664
Manual transaxle shift
indicator (if equipped)
This indicator informs you which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).
EcoShift dual clutch transmission
shift indicator/Automatic transaxle
shift position indicator (if equipped)
The indicator
displays which
EcoShift dual
clutch transmis-
sion/ automatic
transaxle shift
lever is selected.
In DS mode, the “S” indicator displays
with “SPORTS” indicator in cluster. For
more detailed information about DS
mode, refer to the chapter 5.
WARNING - Safe stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes
gradually and with light force,
and slowly move to a safe posi-
tion off the road.
467
Features of your vehicle
Charging system warning
light
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a mal-
function exists somewhere in the elec-
trical charging system. Have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
✽
NOTICE
When the charging system warning light
comes on or the voltage is low (when the
alteranator (or battery) does not operate
normally or it malfunctions), the steer-
ing wheel may get heavy and become dif-
ficult to control operate abnormally.
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
This light comes on when the front fog
lights are ON.
Tailgate lid open warning
light
This warning light illuminates when the
tailgate lid is not closed securely with the
ignition in any position.
Door open warning light
This indicator illuminates when a door is
not closed securely.
Immobilizer indicator
Without smart key system
This light illuminates when the immobiliz-
er key is inserted and turned to the ON
position to start the engine.
At this time, you can start the engine. The
light goes out after the engine is running.
If this light blinks when the ignition switch
is in the ON position before starting the
engine, have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Features of your vehicle
684
With smart key system (if equipped)
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immobi-
lizer indicator illuminates, blinks or the
light goes off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the engine start/stop button is pressed
to the ON position, the indicator will
illuminate until the engine is started.
However, when the smart key is not in
the vehicle, if the engine start/stop but-
ton is depressed, the indicator will blink
for a few minutes to indicate that you
will not be able to start the engine.
• When the ignition switch is pressed to
the ON position and the indicator turns
off after 2 seconds, the system may
need repair. Have the vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When the battery is weak, if the engine
start/stop button is depressed, the indi-
cator will blink and you will not be able
to start the engine. However, you may
still be able to start the engine by
pressing the engine start/stop button
with the smart key. If smart key system
related parts need repair, the indicator
blinks.
Low fuel level warning light
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
Malfunction indicator light
(MIL) (check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indi-
cates that a potential malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the emis-
sion control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
while driving, or does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, take your vehicle to your near-
est authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.
469
Features of your vehicle
ESC indicator (Electronic
Stability Control)
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions. Under normal driv-
ing conditions, the ESC light will remain
off. When a slippery or low traction con-
dition is encountered, the ESC will oper-
ate, and the ESC indicator will blink to
indicate the ESC is operating.
The ESC indicator stays on when the
ESC may have a malfunction. Take your
car to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and have the system checked.
ESC OFF indicator
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated.
CAUTION
• Prolonged driving with the
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
• If the Malfunction Indicator Light
illuminates or blinks, potential
catalytic converter damage is
possible. This could result in loss
of engine power. Have the Engine
Control System inspected as
soon as possible by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Features of your vehicle
704
Cruise indicator (if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster is illuminated when the
cruise control ON-OFF button on the
steering wheel is pushed.
The indicator light turns off when the
cruise control ON-OFF button is pushed
again. For more information about the
use of cruise control, refer to “Cruise
control system or Smart cruise control
system” in section 5.
Cruise SET indicator
The cruise SET indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illuminated when
the cruise control switch (SET- or RES+)
is pushed. The cruise SET indicator light
does not illuminate when the cruise con-
trol switch (CANCEL) is pushed or the
system is disengaged.
Electronic power steering
(EPS) system warning
light
This indicator light comes on after the
ignition key is turned to the ON position
and then it will go out.
This light also comes on when the EPS
needs repairs. If it comes on while driv-
ing, have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Steering effort may increase significantly
if this lamp illuminates. See EPS system
in this section.
Key reminder warning chime
(if equipped)
Without smart key
If the driver’s door is opened while the
ignition key is left in the ignition switch
(ACC or LOCK position), the key
reminder warning chime will sound. This
helps prevent you from locking your keys
in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the
key is removed from the ignition switch or
the driver’s door is closed.
With smart key
If the driver’s door is opened while the
smart key is in the vehicle with the
engine start/stop button in ACC, the key
reminder warning chime will sound.
The chime sounds until the driver’s door
is closed.
CRUISE
SET
471
Features of your vehicle
KEY OUT indicator
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, if any door is open, the sys-
tem checks for the smart key. If the
smart key is not in the vehicle, the indi-
cator will blink, and if all doors are
closed, the chime will also sound for
about 5 seconds. The indicator will turn
off while the vehicle is moving. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle.
Fuel cap open warning
indicator (if equipped)
This warning light indicates the fuel filler
cap is not secure.
Always make sure that the fuel filler cap
is tight.
Washer Fluid Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
In this case, you should refill the washer
fluid.
KEY
OUT
Features of your vehicle
724
LCD display warning
(if equipped)
Shift to "P" position
If you try to turn off the engine without the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/ STOP button will turn
to the ACC position. If the button is
pressed once more it will turn to the ON
position. The warning illuminates on the
LCD display for about 10 seconds to indi-
cate that you should press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift lever
in the P (Park) position to turn off the
engine.
Also, the warning chime sounds for about
10 seconds. (if equipped)
Low key battery
If the ENGINE START/STOP button turns
to the OFF position when the smart key
in the vehicle discharges, the warning
illuminates on the LCD display for about
10 seconds. Also, the warning chime
sounds once.
Replace the battery with a new one.
Press start button while turn steering
If the steering wheel does not unlock nor-
mally when the ENGINE START/ STOP
button is pressed, the warning illumi-
nates for 10 seconds on the LCD display.
Also, the warning chime sounds once
and the ENGINE START/STOP button
light blinks for 10 seconds.
When you are warned, press the
ENGINE START/STOP button while turn-
ing the steering wheel right and left.
OFS042148L/OFS045310L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS042151L/OFS045308L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS042152L/OFS045370L
■ Type B
■ Type C
473
Features of your vehicle
Check steering wheel lock system
If the steering wheel does not lock nor-
mally when the ENGINE START/STOP
button turns to the OFF position, the
warning illuminates for 10 seconds on
the LCD display. Also, the warning chime
sounds for 3 seconds and the ENGINE
START/STOP button light blinks for 10
seconds.
Press brake pedal to start engine
If the ENGINE START /STOP button
turns to the ACC position twice by press-
ing the button repeatedly without
depressing the brake pedal, the warning
illuminates on the LCD display for about
10 seconds to indicate that you should
depress the brake pedal to start the
engine.
Press clutch pedal to start engine
(Manual transaxle)
If the ENGINE START /STOP button
turns to the ACC position twice by press-
ing the button repeatedly without
depressing the clutch pedal, the warning
illuminates on the LCD display for about
10 seconds to indicate that you should
depress the clutch pedal to start the
engine.
OFS045383L/OFS045375L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS042153L/OFS045309L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS042154L/OFS045314L
■ Type B
■ Type C
Features of your vehicle
744
Key is not in vehicle
If the smart key is not in the vehicle and
if any door is opened or closed with the
ENGINE START/ STOP button in the
ACC, ON, or START position, the warn-
ing illuminates on the LCD display. Also,
the chime sounds for 5 seconds when
the smart key is not in the vehicle and the
door is closed.
Always have the smart key with you.
Key is not detected
If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is
not detected and you press the ENGINE
START/ STOP button, the warning illumi-
nates on the LCD display for 10 seconds.
Also, the immobilizer indicator blinks for
10 seconds.
Press start button again
If you can not operate the ENGINE
START/ STOP button when there is a
problem with the ENGINE START/STOP
button system, the warning illuminates
for 10 seconds and the chime sounds
continuously to indicate that you could
start the engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button once more.
The chime will stop if the ENGINE
START/STOP button system works nor-
mally or the theft alarm system is armed.
If the warning illuminates each time you
press the ENGINE START/STOP button,
take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
OFS042145L/OFS045306L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045374L/OFS045373L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS042146L/OFS045312L
■ Type B
■ Type C
475
Features of your vehicle
Press start button with smart key
If you press the ENGINE START/ STOP
button while the warning “Key is not
detected” illuminates the warning “Please
press the start button with smart key” illu-
minates for 10 seconds on the LCD dis-
play. Also, the immobilizer indicator blinks
for 10 seconds.
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse
When the stop lamp fuse is disconnect-
ed, the warning illuminates for 10 sec-
onds on the LCD display.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If that
is not possible you can start the engine
by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP
button for 10 seconds in ACC.
Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine
If you try to start the engine with the shift
lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral)
position, the warning illuminates for
about 10 seconds on the LCD display.
You can also start the engine with the
shift lever in the N(Neutral) position, but
for your safety start the engine with the
shift lever in the P(Park) position.
OFS042147L/OFS045311L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045150L/OFS045315L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS042149L/OFS045313L
■ Type B
■ Type C
Features of your vehicle
764
Low washer fluid (if equipped)
This warning message illuminates on the
service reminder mode if the washer fluid
level in the reservoir is nearly empty.
It means that you should refill the washer
fluid.
Door open
It displays the corresponding door or tail-
gate that is not closed securely.
Low Tire Pressure
When one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under inflated, the warning illumi-
nates on the LCD display.
OFS045321L/OFS045316L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS042156L/OFS045156L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045352L/OFS045305L
■ Type B
■ Type C
477
Features of your vehicle
Rear parking assist warning
(if equipped)
It displays the area an obstacle is detect-
ed while moving rearward.
For details, refer to “Rear parking assist
system” in section 4.
OFS045372L/OFS045371L
■ Type B
■ Type C
Features of your vehicle
784
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement of
the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 47 in. (120
cm) behind the vehicle. This system is a
supplemental system and it is not intend-
ed to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limit-
ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the indi-
cator on the rear parking assist OFF
button is not illuminated.
If you desire to deactivate the rear park-
ing assist system, press the rear parking
assist OFF button again. (The indicator
on the button will illuminate.) To turn the
system on, press the button again. (The
indicator on the button will go off.)
• This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition switch ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed over
10 km/h (6 mph), the system may not
be activated correctly.
WARNING
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
while backing up.
OFS040080
Sensors
OFS040136
479
Features of your vehicle
• The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47
in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently
• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31
in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps more frequently
• When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.)
of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system may
not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when the moisture
has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate
normally when the material is removed
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-
ent).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the sensor.
7. Trailer towing.
Features of your vehicle
804
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water. (The sens-
ing range will return to normal when
removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
The following objects may not be rec-
ognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-
sor frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
(40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.)
in diameter.
Rear parking assist system pre-
cautions
• The rear parking assist system may
not sound sequentially depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor per-
formance.
• The sensor may not recognize objects
less than 40 cm (15 in.) from the sen-
sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-
tance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor. Sensor damage could occur.
✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors;
it can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the vehi-
cle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visu-
al inspection to make sure the vehi-
cle is clear of all obstructions
before moving the vehicle in any
direction.
481
Features of your vehicle
Self-diagnosis (if equipped)
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more of
the below occurs you may have a mal-
function in the rear parking assist sys-
tem.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
Features of your vehicle
824
REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through
the monitor while backing-up.
✽
NOTICE
The rearview camera may not operate
normally, in extremely high or low
temperatures (operating temperature :
-20°C~65°C (-13°F~149°F)).
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. This
causes all turn signal lights to blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate even
though the key is not in the ignition
switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
WARNING
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibil-
ity of the driver to always check
the inside/outside rearview mirror
and the area behind the vehicle
before and while backing up.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered with
foreign matter, the camera may
not operate normally.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
OFS040081
OFS040082
OFS042083N
483
Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key (smart
key : turns off the engine) and opens
the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed
(smart key : turns off the engine), per-
form the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlamp delay (if equipped)
If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC
or OFF position with the headlights ON,
the headlights remain on for about 5 min-
utes. However, if the driver’s door is
opened and closed, the headlights are
turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmit-
ter (or smart key) twice or turning the
light switch to the OFF or Auto position.
However, if you turn the light switch to the
Auto position when it is dark outside, the
headlights will not be turned off.
Headlamp welcome function
(if equipped)
When the headlight switch is in the ON or
AUTO position and all doors (and tail-
gate) are closed and locked, if you press
the door unlock button on the transmitter
(or smart key), the headlights will come
on for about 15 seconds.
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, the function can only operate at
night.
At this time, if you press the door unlock
button again or door lock button on the
transmitter (or smart key), the headlights
will turn off immediately.
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (other than the
driver's door), the battery saver
function does not operate and the
headlamp delay does not turn off
automatically. This will cause the
battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
844
Daytime running light
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make
it easier for others to see the front of your
vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-
ful in many different driving conditions,
and it is especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The headlight are ON.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. Engine stops.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the parking
light position, the tail, position and
license plate lights will turn on and the
tail light indicator will turn on.
OXM049110 OAM049041
485
Features of your vehicle
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position the head, tail, license and instru-
ment panel lights will turn on.
✽
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light outside
the vehicle.
CAUTION
• Never place anything over sensor
(1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work prop-
erly.
OFS040084OAM049042
Features of your vehicle
864
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
Turn signals and lane change sig-
nals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-
ment panel indicate which turn signal is
operating. They will self-cancel after a
turn is completed. If the indicator contin-
ues to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
OAM049043OAM049044
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other dri-
ver's vision.
OAM049045
487
Features of your vehicle
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
One-touch triple turn signal
(One Touch Turn Signal) (if equipped)
To activate the one-touch lane change
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3 (5 or 7, if
equipped) times.
You can activate/deactivate the One
Touch Turn Signal function or choose the
number of blinking (3, 5, or 7) from the
User Settings Mode on the LCD display
(if equipped).
✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, a bulb may be burned out or
have a poor electrical connection in the
circuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow etc. The fog lights will turn
on when fog light switch (1) is turned to
ON after the headlights are turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch
to OFF.
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor or
unnecessary battery and generator
drain could occur.
OAM049046
Features of your vehicle
884
WIPERS AND WASHERS
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes*
D : Rear wiper/washer control*
· ON – Continuous wipe
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)*
✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
OAM049100N OAM049048N
489
Features of your vehicle
Windshield washers (front)
In the Off position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
OYF049101
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windshield and obscure your
vision.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
Features of your vehicle
904
Rear window wiper and washer
switch (if equipped)
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wiper
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to desired position to operate the rear
wiper and washer.
ON - Normal wiper operation
INT- Intermittent wipe
OFF - Wiper is not in operation
Push the lever away from you to spray
rear washer fluid and to run the rear
wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper
operation will continue until you release
the lever.
OAM049103N OXM049125
491
Features of your vehicle
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn off
approximately 20 minutes after the igni-
tion switch is turned off.
If your vehicle is equipped with the theft
alarm system, the interior lights automat-
ically turn off approximately 5 seconds
after the system is in the armed stage.
Map lamp
Push the lens (1) to turn the map lamp on
or off. This light produces a spot beam for
convenient use as a map lamp at night or
as a personal lamp for the driver and the
front passenger.
• DOOR : In the DOOR position, the map
lamp and the room lamp come
on when any door is opened
regardless of the ignition
switch position.
OMD040096
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
Features of your vehicle
924
When doors are unlocked by
the transmitter (or smart key),
the map lamp and the room
lamp come on for approximate-
ly 30 seconds as long as any
door is not open. The map lamp
and the room lamp goes out
gradually after approximately 30
seconds if the door is closed.
However, if the ignition switch is
ON or all doors are locked, the
map lamp and the room lamp
will turn off immediately. If a
door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC or LOCK
position, the map lamp and the
room lamp stay on for about 20
minutes. However, if a door is
opened with the ignition switch
in the ON position, the map
lamp and the room lamp stay on
continuously.
• ON : Map lamp and room lamp stay on
at all times.
• OFF : The lights turn off even if a door
is opened.
❈ When the lamp is turned ON by
pressing the lens (1) the lamp
does not turn off even if the
switch (2) is in the OFF position.
Room lamp (if equipped)
• ON (1):
In the ON position, the light stays on at all
times.
• DOOR (2) :
In the DOOR position, the light comes on
when any door is opened regardless of
the ignition switch position.
When doors are unlocked by the trans-
mitter (or smart key), the light comes on
for approximately 30 seconds as long as
any door is not open. The light goes out
gradually after approximately 30 seconds
if the door is closed. However, if the igni-
tion switch is ON or all doors are locked,
the light will turn off immediately.
If a door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the
light stays on for about 20 minutes.
However, if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ON position, the
light stays on continuously.
• OFF (3) :
In the OFF position, the light stays off at
all times even when a door is open.
ORB040361
493
Features of your vehicle
Tailgate room lamp
The tailgate room lamp comes on when
the tailgate is opened.
✽
NOTICE
Make sure to close the tailgate securely.
If it remains open while engine is not
running, it may cause battery discharge
because luggage room lamp remains on.
Vanity mirror lamp
Push the switch to turn the light on or off.
• : The lamp will turn on if this button
is pressed.
• : The lamp will turn off if this button
is pressed.
Glove box lamp
(if equipped)
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
OLM049105
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp (if equipped)
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is
closed without the lamp off, it may
discharge the battery or damage
the sunvisor.
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the glove box
securely after using the glove box.
OFS040133OFS040089
CAUTION
The tailgate room lamp comes on
as long as the tailgate lid opens. To
prevent unnecessary charging sys-
tem drain, close the tailgate lid
securely after using the tailgate
room.
Features of your vehicle
944
✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
rear window, while the engine is running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before oper-
ating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
If your vehicle is equipped with the out-
side rearview mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on the
rear window defroster.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
OFS040090
495
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. A/C (Air conditioning) button
2. Air intake control button
3. Rear window defroster button
4. Mode selection button
5. Fan speed control knob
6. Temperature control knob
7. Front windshield defroster button
8. Max A/C button
OFS040091
Features of your vehicle
964
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heat-
ing and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air or recirculated air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
OFS040093N
497
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield, side window
defrosters, and side vents.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters,
and side vents.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side vents.
OFS040092
Features of your vehicle
984
MAX A/C-Level (B, D)
To operate the MAX A/C, turn the fan
speed control knob to the right then
press the MAX A/C button. Air flow is
directed toward the upper body and face.
Be sure to adjust the instrument panel
vents towards the occupants accordingly
for maximum cooling effectiveness.
In this mode, the air conditioning and the
recirculated air position will be selected
automatically.
After the interior as cooled sufficiently,
resume to normal A/C mode to allow out-
side fresh air position.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivered from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flow-
ing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature inside the
vehicle, turn the knob to the right for
warm air or left for cooler air.
OFS040095 OFS040096OFS040094
499
Features of your vehicle
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh) air
position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when the
recirculated air position is
selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button will not illuminate
when the outside (fresh) air
position is selected.
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.
✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged operation of the
air conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessively
dry air in the passenger compartment.
WARNING
• Continued use of the climate con-
trol system operation in the recircu-
lated air position may allow humid-
ity to increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continued use of the climate con-
trol system operation in the recir-
culated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
OFS040097
Features of your vehicle
1004
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to the
“0” position turns off the fan.
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the “0” position.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate). Press the button again to turn
the air conditioning system off.
OFS040098 OFS040099OFS043098A
4101
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To prevent dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through the
ventilation system, temporarily set the
air intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irrita-
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly R-134a
refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the recir-
culated air position. However, pro-
longed operation of the reticulated air
position will excessively dry the air. In
this case, change the air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position then set the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
Features of your vehicle
1024
✽
NOTICE
• While using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the engine temperature
gauge closely while driving up hills or
in heavy traffic when outside temper-
atures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the engine temperature
gauge indicates engine overheating.
• Opening the windows in humid
weather while air conditioning oper-
ates may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to electri-
cal equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the windows
closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehi-
cle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner exces-
sively, the difference between the tem-
perature of the outside air and that of
the windshield could cause the outer
surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this case,
set the mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan speed con-
trol to the lower speed.
4103
Features of your vehicle
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air fil-
ter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
influence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
It is important that the correct type and
amount of oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, damage to the compressor
and abnormal system operation may
occur.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service
may cause serious injury to the
person performing the service.
OMG075033
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1044
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. A/C (Air conditioning) button
2. Air intake control button
3. Rear window defroster button
4. Mode selection button
5. Temperature control knob
6. Fan speed control button
7. Auto button
8. OFF button
9. Front windshield defroster button
10. Climate information button
OFS040100
4105
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air condi-
tioning
1.Push the AUTO button. It is indicated
by AUTO on the display.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically by temperature setting.
2.Turn the temperature control knob to
set the desired temperature.
✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time to
deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The AUTO sign
will illuminate on the information
display once again.)
- Fan speed control knob
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate con-
trol, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 23°C/73°F.
• Regardless of the temperature setting,
when using automatic operation, the
air conditioning system can automati-
cally turn on to decrease the humidity
inside the vehicle, even if the tempera-
ture is set to warm.
OFS040101 OFS040105
Features of your vehicle
1064
✽
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
Manual heating and air condition-
ing
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pressing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this case,
the system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons selected.
When pressing any button (or turning
any knob) except AUTO button while
automatic operation, the functions not
selected will be controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to con-
vert to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-
mate control system”.
OFS040103OFS045102L
4107
Features of your vehicle
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side win-
dow defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost mode
When you select the defrost mode, the
following system settings will be made
automatically:
• The air conditioning system will be
turned on.
• The outside(fresh) air position will be
selected.
• The fan speed will be set to the high
speed.
To turn the defrost mode off, press the
mode button or defrost button again or
AUTO button.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet port can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumb-
wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to
the maximum position. To open the vent,
rotate it right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivered from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
OFS040095OFS040104
Features of your vehicle
1084
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the
right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the
left extremely.
When turning the knob, the temperature
will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.
When set to the lowest temperature set-
ting, the air conditioning will operate con-
tinuously.
Temperature conversion
This allows you to set the unit of the dis-
tance and the temperature to the celsius
and the fahrenheit on your navigation
system.
- Temperature: Change the temperature
between the “F” and “C”.
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh) air
position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
OFS040106OFS040105
4109
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when the
recirculated air position is
selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
passenger compartment
will be drawn through the
heating system and heated
or cooled according to the
function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button does not illuminate
when the outside (fresh) air
position is selected.
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.
✽
NOTICE
It should be noted that prolonged oper-
ation of the heating in recirculated air
position will cause fogging of the wind-
shield and side windows and the air
within the passenger compartment will
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected, will result in excessive-
ly dry air in the passenger compart-
ment.
WARNING
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air
conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while driv-
ing.
Features of your vehicle
1104
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by pressing the fan speed control
switch. To change the fan speed, press
( ) the switch for higher speed, or
push ( ) the switch for lower speed.
To turn the fan speed control off, press
the front blower OFF button.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli-
mate control system. However you can
still operate the mode and air intake but-
tons as long as the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
✽
NOTICE
If you push the “CLIMATE” button, the
climate information will be displayed on
screen.
OFS040109
OFS040108OFS040107
4111
Features of your vehicle
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air fil-
ter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
influence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
It is important that the correct type and
amount of oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, damage to the compressor
and abnormal system operation may
occur.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service
may cause serious injury to the
person performing the service.
Features of your vehicle
1124
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-
perature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, out-
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-
dows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up
inside of the windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except “0” posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically. Additionally, the air con-
ditioning will automatically operate if
the mode is selected to the posi-
tion.
If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)
air position are not selected automatical-
ly, press the corresponding button manu-
ally.
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The dif-
ference between the temperature of
the outside air and that of the wind-
shield could cause the outer sur-
face of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
or button to the position and
fan speed control knob or button to
a lower speed.
OFS040110
4113
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-
tioning will be selected automatically.
If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air
position and higher fan speed are not
selected automatically, adjust the corre-
sponding button or knob manually.
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature, outside (fresh) air posi-
tion and higher fan speed will be
selected automatically.
5. If blower fan speed is low, the blower
fan speed will be set middle speed
automatically.
If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air
position and higher fan speed are not
selected automatically, adjust the corre-
sponding button or knob manually.
If the position is selected, lower fan
speed is controlled to higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set fan speed to the highest position.
2. Set temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
5. If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh)
air position and higher fan speed are
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button or knob manual-
ly.
If the position is selected, lower fan
speed is controlled to higher fan speed.
OFS040111 OFS040112 OFS040113
Features of your vehicle
1144
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air intake
or air conditioning are controlled auto-
matically according to certain conditions
such as or position. To cancel or
return the defogging logic, do the follow-
ing.
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Select the defrost button ( ).
3. Press the air intake control button at
least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of inter-
val. It indicates that the defogging logic is
canceled or returned to the programmed
status.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Press the defrost button ( ).
3. While holding the air conditioning
(A/C) button, press the air intake con-
trol button at least 5 times within 3 sec-
onds.
The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5
seconds of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
OFS040114 OFS040115
4115
Features of your vehicle
Auto defogging system
(Only for automatic climate control
system, if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibility of
fogging up the inside of the windshield by
automatically sensing the moisture of
inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the AUTO mode is on.
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture
of inside the windshield and
operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher
steps operate as follow.
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Blowing air flow toward the wind-
shield
Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward the
windshield
Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto
defogging system, it is automatically acti-
vated when the conditions are met.
However, if you would like to cancel the
auto defogging system, press the front
defroster button 4 times within 2 seconds
while pressing the AUTO button. The
indicator will blink 3 times to notify you
that the system is cancelled. To use the
auto defogging system again, follow the
procedures mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected or
discharged, it resets to the auto defog-
ging status.
✽
NOTICE
If the A/C off is manually selected while
the auto defogging system is on, the auto
defogging indicator will blink 3 times to
give notice that the A/C off can not be
selected.
OFS043232
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
1164
Center console storage
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or front passenger.
To open the center console storage pull
up the lever.
Glove box
To open the glove box, push the button
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover cannot close
securely.
OFS040118
OFS040117
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
4117
Features of your vehicle
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compart-
ment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the holders located in
the cargo area to attach the luggage net.
OMD040130
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass hold-
er. Such objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, pos-
sibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The
rear view mirror of the vehicle
can be blocked by an open sun-
glass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder to prevent
breakage or deformation of
glasses. It may cause personal
injury if you try to open it forcibly
when the glasses are jammed in
holder.
OFS040125
Features of your vehicle
1184
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net, ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of the
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT
use when the strap has visible
signs of wear or damage.
4119
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you may burn your-
self. Such a burn to the driver
could lead to loss of control of
the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncov-
ered or unsecured bottles, glass-
es, cans, etc., in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of direct
sun light and do not put them in a
vehicle that is heated up. It may
explode.
CAUTION
When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high tem-
peratures. This may damage the
chrome part of the cup holder.
OFS040121
OFS040122
■ Font
■ Rear
Features of your vehicle
1204
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull
it downward, unsnap it from the bracket
(1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and open the mirror cover (3).
The ticket holder (4) is provided to hold
tickets such as tollgate ticket.
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
CAUTION
• Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor
is closed without the lamp off, it
may discharge the battery or
damage the sunvisor.
• Always use the sunvisor exten-
sion, after swinging the sunvisor
to the side.
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct your
vision when using the sunvisor.
ORBR040085 OFS042123N
4121
Features of your vehicle
AC inverter (if equipped)
The AC inverter supplies 115VAC/150W
electric power to operate electric acces-
sories or equipment when the ignition
switch is in the ON position or engine is
running.
The AC inverter is turned on by pushing
in the switch. To turn the AC inverter off,
push the switch a second time.
✽
NOTICE
When pushing the AC inverter switch,
the switch indicator illumination is
delayed momentarily while the system
conducts a self-check.
CAUTION
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the accessory plug after use.
Using the accessory plug for pro-
longed periods of time with the
engine off could cause the bat-
tery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in elec-
tric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when
plugged into a vehicle’s power out-
let. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and malfunc-
tions in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
WARNING
Do not put finger or a foreign
objects (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hands.
You may get an electric shock.
OFS042173N
OFS042174N
Features of your vehicle
1224
Cigarette lighter
For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC or ON
position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element is
heated, the lighter will pop out to the
“ready” position.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette
lighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAI
replacement or its approved equivalent.
WARNING
The AC inverter can be dangerous!
When using the AC inverter, care-
fully observe the following precau-
tions to avoid serious injuries.
• Do not use heated electric prod-
ucts (coffeepot, toaster, heater,
iron, etc.).
• Do not insert foreign objects into
or touch the AC inverter; you may
get shocked.
• Do not let children operate or
touch the AC inverter.
• When not using the AC inverter,
close the cover.
(Continued)
• Do not use two or more electric
accessories or equipment at the
same time.
• When the AC inverter voltage is
under 11V, the vehicle battery
LED and indicator will blink, and
will automatically turn off.
CAUTION
• When not using the AC inverter,
make sure that the switch is
turned off, and the AC inverter
covered.
• Only use the AC inverter when the
engine is running, and remove
the plug from the AC inverter after
using the accessory. Using the
AC inverter when the engine is
not running or leaving the acces-
sory plugged in for a long time
may cause the battery to dis-
charge.
• Do not use electric accessories
or equipment with maximum elec-
tric power consumption greater
than 150W (115VAC).
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into the AC inverter.
These devices may cause exces-
sive audio noise and malfunctions
in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
• Do not use broken electric acces-
sories or equipment, as they may
damage the AC inverter and vehi-
cle's electrical system.
(Continued)
OFS042119N
4123
Features of your vehicle
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.
Clock
See AV/AVN manual.
CAUTION
Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may
damage the socket or cause electri-
cal failure.
WARNING
• Do not hold the lighter in after it
is already heated because it will
overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
OFS040120
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while driv-
ing. You may lose your steering
control and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
Features of your vehicle
1244
Shopping bag holder
(if equipped)
Clothes hanger (if equipped) Floor mat anchor(s)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
OFS040124
OFS040137
CAUTION
Do not hang a bag weighing more
than 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause dam-
age to the shopping bag holder.
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy objects on the
clothes hanger or it may damage
the hook.
WARNING
The floor mat must be properly
anchored so that it will not interfere
with the operation of the accelera-
tor pedal. Any interference with the
accelerator pedal could cause the
accelerator pedal to be unable to
return to the idle position. A pedal
that cannot return to the idle posi-
tion could lead to an accident
which may result in severe person-
al injury or death.
OFS040126
4125
Features of your vehicle
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod
port, you can use an aux port to connect
audio devices and a USB port to plug in
a USB, or use the Apple dundle cable the
plugs into both ports to connect an ipod.
✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Navigation system (if equipped)
The navigation system ascertains the
present position of your vehicle by using
information from satellites and guides
you to the place you assign as the desti-
nation.
Detailed information for the navigation
system is described in a seperate manual.
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
hands-free (if equipped)
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
wireless technolo-
gy.
Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology hands-free is
described in the "Audio section" in this
chapter or in the manual supplied sepa-
rately.
OFS045129
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle, so that it will not inter-
fere with the pedal.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
HYUNDAI recommends that only
the HYUNDAI floor mat designed
for use in your vehicle be
installed.
Features of your vehicle
1264
✽
NOTICE
• If you install an after market HID
(high intensity discharge) head lamp,
your vehicle's audio and electronic
device may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner,
and air freshener from contacting the
interior parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
Antenna
Glass antenna (if equipped)
When the radio power switch is turned on
while the ignition key is in either the “ON”
or “ACC” position, your car will receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals
through the antenna in the rear window
glass.
Sharkfin antenna (if equipped)
The sharkfin type antenna will receive
XM, GPS and transmit data for the blue
link services.
AUDIO SYSTEM
OFS040127
CAUTION
• Do not clean the inside of the rear
window glass with a cleaner or
scraper to remove foreign
deposits as this may cause dam-
age to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and FM
broadcast signals.
4127
Features of your vehicle
Audio remote control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio remote control
switch is installed for your convenience.
VOL (VOL+/VOL-) (1)
Increases or decreases the volume level.
SEEK ( / ) (2)
• Press this button.
- Automatic tuning:
- Track up/down:
• Press and hold this button.
- Manual tuning:
- Search (FF/REW):
MODE (3)
Selects a source.
FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
➟ CD ➟ USB (or iPod) ➟ AUX ➟ FM1...
(4)
Press this button briefly to reject a call
during a call.
(5)
• Press this button to start the voice
recognition mode.
• Press the button one more to cancel
voice commands while the voice
recognition is active.
(6)
Enables
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
Hands-Free Phone.
• Press this button briefly to take a call
when there is an incoming call.
• Press this button briefly to make a call
from last calls.
• Press this button lengthy to switch the
sound path during a call.
(Hands free ↔ phone)
BT
iPodCDUSB
RADIO
BT
iPodCDUSB
RADIO
CAUTION
Do not operate the audio remote
control switches simultaneously.
OFS040128
OFS042128N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
1284
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal
is then received by the radio and sent to
your vehicle speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best pos-
sible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the dis-
tance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the pres-
ence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-
low the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmos-
phere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide bet-
ter signal coverage.
JBM002
AM radio reception
JBM001
FM radio reception
4129
Features of your vehicle
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by build-
ings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening con-
ditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The fol-
lowing conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves away
from the radio station, the signal will
weaken and sound will begin to fade.
When this occurs, we suggest that you
select another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the trans-
mitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering nois-
es to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the distur-
bance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-
est signal. If this occurs, select another
station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflect-
ed signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
JBM005JBM004JBM003
FM radio station
Features of your vehicle
1304
Satellite radio reception
You may experience difficulties in receiv-
ing XM™ satellite radio signals in the fol-
lowing situations.
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a cov-
ered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top level
of a multi-level freeway.
• If you drive under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks
the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where the
surrounding hills or peaks block the
signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving on a mountain road
where is the signal blocked by moun-
tains.
• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (10m /30 ft.
or more), for example on an road that
goes through a dense forest.
• The signal can become weak in some
areas that are not covered by the XM™
repeater network.
NOTE:
There may be other unforeseen cir-
cumstances leading to reception prob-
lems with the XM™ satellite radio sig-
nal.
SATELLITE2
SATELLITE1
4131
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-
lar phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
Care of disc
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows for ventila-
tion before using your car audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from get-
ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure no undesirable matter other
than CDs are inserted into the CD
player (Do not insert more than one
CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, if you
still continue to use those CDs, they
may cause the malfunction of your car
audio system.
✽
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that if you
try to play copy protected CDs and the
CD player does not perform correctly
the CDs maybe defective, not the CD
player.
✽
NOTICE
For more detailed information about
audio system, check the supported CD.
CAUTION
When using a communication sys-
tem such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone while
driving. Stop at a safe location to
use a cellular phone.
5
Before driving / 5-3
Key position / 5-5
Engine start/stop button / 5-8
Manual transaxle / 5-13
Automatic transaxle / 5-16
EcoShift dual clutch transmission (For GDI) / 5-23
EcoShift dual clutch transmission (For T-GDI) / 5-31
Brake system / 5-40
Cruise control system / 5-51
Active ECO system / 5-55
Economical operation / 5-56
Special driving conditions / 5-58
Winter driving / 5-62
Vehicle load limit / 5-65
Vehicle weight / 5-70
Trailer towing / 5-70
Driving your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
25
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-
dows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-
tion.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the
exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are
kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
53
Driving your vehicle
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in sec-
tion 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control, that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death. The dri-
ver’s primary responsibility is in
the safe and legal operation of a
vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehi-
cle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle
or which are not permissible by law
should never be used during oper-
ation of the vehicle.
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
Driving your vehicle
45
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children, before putting a
car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment. Driving
while under the influence of drugs
is as dangerous or more dangerous
than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Keep all things in the vehicle
safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be care-
ful when operating what may dis-
turb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
55
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the ON position. The light will go
off immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft (if equipped). The ignition
key can be removed only in the LOCK
position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked (if
equipped) and electrical accessories are
operative.
✽
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced in turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
KEY POSITION
OYF059017N OYF059016
Driving your vehicle
65
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START posi-
tion to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake warn-
ing lamp can be checked in this position.
Starting the engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position. The starter will not oper-
ate if the clutch pedal is not fully
depressed.
Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
WARNING - Ignition switch
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• Before leaving the driver's seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is engaged in 1st gear for the
manual transaxle or P (Park) for
Ecoshift dual clutch transmis-
sion, set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition
switch, or any other controls
through the steering wheel while
the vehicle is in motion.The pres-
ence of your hand or arm in this
area could cause a loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an
accident.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake, accelerator
pedal, and clutch (if equipped).
57
Driving your vehicle
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
It should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
4. Do not wait for the engine to warm up
while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while the vehicle
is in motion, do not attempt to move
the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion. If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and turn the
ignition switch to the START posi-
tion in an attempt to restart the
engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
Driving your vehicle
85
Illuminated engine start/stop but-
ton (if equipped)
Whenever the front door is opened, the
engine start/stop button will illuminate for
your convenience. The light will go off
immediately when the engine start/stop
button is turned on or go off after about
30 seconds when the door is closed.
Engine start/stop button position
OFF
• with manual transaxle
To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle
then press the engine start/stop button
when the engine start/stop button is in
the ON position.
• with Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission
To turn off the engine, press the engine
start/stop button when the engine
start/stop button is in the ON position
and the shift lever in P(Park). When you
press the engine start/stop button with-
out the shift lever in P(Park), the engine
start/stop button does not turn to the
OFF position but to the ACC position.
✽
NOTICE
When you turn off the engine, the vehi-
cle should be stopped.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
OFS050005
WARNING
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is moving, you can turn off
the engine and turn the engine
start/stop button to the ACC posi-
tion by pressing the engine
start/stop button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is
moving, you can restart the engine
without pressing the brake pedal by
pressing the engine start/stop but-
ton with the shift lever in N(Neutral).
59
Driving your vehicle
ACC(Accessory)
• with manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• with Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
If you leave the engine start/stop button
in the ACC position for more than 1 hour,
the button is turned off automatically to
prevent the battery from discharging.
ON
• with manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the ACC position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• with Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the ACC position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not leave
the button in the ON position if the engine
is not running to prevent the battery from
discharging.
START
• with manual transaxle
To start the engine, depress the clutch
pedal and brake pedal, then press the
engine start/stop button with the shift
lever in the N(Neutral) position.
• with Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P(Park)
or the N (Neutral) position.
✽
NOTICE
• If you press the engine start/stop but-
ton without depressing the clutch
pedal on manual transaxle vehicles or
without depressing the brake pedal on
Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission vehicles, the
engine will not start and the engine
start/stop button changes as follows:
OFF
→
ACC
→
ON
→
OFF
• If you leave the engine start/stop but-
ton in the ACC or the ON position for
a long time, the battery may be dis-
charged.
Driving your vehicle
105
Starting the engine
1.Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
3. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Depress the
brake and clutch pedal fully.
Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
4.Press the engine start/stop button.
It should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
WARNING
• Never press the engine start/stop
button while the vehicle is in
motion. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• Before leaving the driver's seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is engaged in 1st gear for the
manual transaxle or P (Park) for
the Ecoshift dual clutch transmis-
sion, set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the engine
start/stop button, or any other
controls through the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle control,
an accident and serious bodily
injury or death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an
accident.
• While driving, if you push the
ENGINE START/ STOP button, the
warning buzzer sounds for 1 sec-
ond.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake, accelerator
and clutch pedal (if equipped).
511
Driving your vehicle
5. Do not wait for the engine to warm up
while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
but it is not close to the driver’s seat
area, then the engine may not start.
• When the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC or ON position, if any door is
open, the system checks for the smart
key. If the smart key is not in the vehi-
cle, and if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for about 5 seconds.
Keep the smart key in the vehicle,
when using the ACC position or if the
vehicle engine is on.
✽
NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button with the smart key.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you
can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
you are not able to replace the fuse,
you can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button for 10 sec-
onds with the engine start/stop button
in the ACC mode. Always depress the
brake pedal and clutch pedal (if
equipped) before starting the engine.
WARNING
The engine will start by pressing
the engine start/stop button, only
when the smart key is in the vehi-
cle. Never allow children or any per-
son who is unfamiliar with the vehi-
cle to touch the engine start/stop
button or related parts.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the
N(Neutral) position while the vehi-
cle is still moving and press the
engine start/stop button in an
attempt to restart the engine.
OFS050010
Driving your vehicle
125
CAUTION
Do not press the engine start/stop
button for more than 5 seconds
except when the stop lamp fuse is
disconnected.
513
Driving your vehicle
Manual transaxle operation
The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized
in all forward gears so shifting to either a
higher or a lower gear is easily accom-
plished.
To shift gears, press the clutch pedal
down fully, select the desired gear with
the gearshift lever, and release the clutch
pedal slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-
tion lock switch, the engine will not start
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal.
The shift lever must be returned to the
neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). The button (1) located at the
bottom front of the shift knob must be
pressed and held in while moving the
shift lever to the R (Reverse) position.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OMD050009
The shift lever can be moved into any
of the forward gears without pressing
the button (1).
You should press the button (1) when
moving the shift lever into reverse.
OFS053067
The shift lever can be moved without
pulling up the ring (1).
The ring (1) must be pulled up while
moving the shift lever.
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
145
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant is
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),
leave the shift lever in the neutral posi-
tion and release the clutch. Depress the
clutch pedal back down, and then shift
into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.
WARNING
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then make
sure the transaxle is shifted into 1st
gear when the vehicle is parked on
a level or uphill, and shifted into R
(Reverse) on a downhill.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement can occur if these pre-
cautions are not followed in the
order identified.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, do not use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on a
hill, while waiting for a traffic
light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
• When operating the clutch pedal,
press the clutch pedal down fully.
If you don't press the clutch pedal
fully, the clutch may be damaged
or noise may occur.
CAUTION
• When downshifting from fifth gear
to fourth gear, caution should be
taken not to inadvertently press
the shift lever sideways in such a
manner that the second gear is
engaged. Such a drastic down-
shift may cause the engine speed
to increase to the point that the
tachometer will enter the red-
zone. Such over-revving of the
engine and transaxle may possi-
bly cause engine damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high
speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such
a downshifting may damage the
engine, clutch and the transaxle.
• When shifting between 5
th
and 6
th
gear, you should always push the
gear level all the way to the right.
You could otherwise shift unin-
tentionally into 3
rd
or 4
th
gear and
damage the transaxle.
515
Driving your vehicle
Using the clutch
The clutch should be depressed all the
way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. The clutch pedal should
always be fully released while driving. Do
not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This can cause unneces-
sary wear. Do not partially engage the
clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline.
This causes unnecessary wear. Use the
foot brake or parking brake to hold the
vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the
clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
Downshifting
It is important to downshift when you
must slow down in heavy traffic or while
driving up or down steep hills.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration.
When the vehicle is traveling down steep
hills, downshifting helps maintain safe
speed and prolongs brake life.
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, shift to a lower gear.
When you do this, engine braking will
help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better con-
trol of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse). The transaxle can be
damaged if you do not.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
• Avoid depressing the brake and
accelerator pedals simultaneous-
ly. If both pedals are depressed
simultaneously, the brake system
will override the accelerator and
the vehicle speed will reduce.
Driving your vehicle
165
Automatic transaxle operation
The Automatic transaxle has 6 forward
speeds and one reverse speed. The indi-
vidual forward speeds are selected auto-
matically in the D (Drive) position.
✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the Transaxle Control Module.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OFS050015
Depress the brake pedal when shifting, if your vehicle is equipped shift lock system.
The shift lever can be moved freely.
517
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
Transaxle ranges
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
WARNING
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a car into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on a hill, do not
hold the vehicle with engine
power. Use the service brake or
the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
185
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not locked.
The vehicle will roll freely even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of
Reverse (R) or Drive (D) to prevent
damage to the transaxle, except as
explained in “Rocking the vehicle”
in this section.
OFS050017
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Sports mode
519
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone, the transaxle
shifts automatically to a higher gear.
• To maintain the required levels of vehi-
cle performance and safety, the system
may not execute certain gearshifts
when the shift lever is operated.
• When accelerating from a stop on a
slippery road, push the shift lever for-
ward into the +(up) position. This
causes the transaxle to shift into the
2nd gear which is better for smooth
driving on a slippery road. Push the
shift lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when the
shift lever is in the D position or the
sports mode.
The paddle shifter can operate when the
vehicle speed is more than 6.2 mph
(10km/h).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear and the system
changes from D (Drive) mode you used
to sports mode.
If the vehicle speed is lower than 6.2 mph
(10km/h), if you depress the accelerator
pedal for more than 7 seconds, if you
shift the shift lever from D to sport mode
and shift it from sports mode to D again
or if you hold the paddle shifter [+] lever
over 1 second, the system will change
from sports mode to D (Drive) mode you
used.
With the shift lever in the sport mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear.
✽
NOTICE
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle shifters
at the same time, you can't shift gears.
OFS052018N
Driving your vehicle
205
Shift lock system
For your safety, the Automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a clicking
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
shift-lock access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the access
hole and press down on the screwdriv-
er.
3. Move the shift lever.
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. If the ignition switch is in any
other position, the key cannot be
removed.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the car.
OFS055016
521
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into R
(Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow the car.
• When driving in sports mode, slow
down before shifting to a lower gear.
Otherwise, the lower gear may not be
engaged.
• When parking the vehicle, always
engage the parking brake. Do not
depend on shifting into Park to keep
the vehicle from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
Driving your vehicle
225
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Do not rev up the engine. This may
cause engine over-heating,
transaxle damage or failure, and
tire damage.
523
Driving your vehicle
EcoShift dual clutch transmission
operation
The EcoShift dual clutch transmission
has 6 forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are select-
ed automatically, depending on the posi-
tion of the shift lever.
ECOSHIFT DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (FOR GDI) (IF EQUIPPED)
OFS055015
Depress the brake pedal when shifting, if your vehicle is equipped shift lock system.
The shift lever can be moved freely.
WARNING
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a car into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
Driving your vehicle
245
• The Ecoshift dual clutch transmission
gives the driving feel of a manual trans-
mission, yet provides the ease of a
fully automatic transmission. Unlike a
traditional automatic transmission, the
gear shifting can be felt (and heard) on
the Ecoshift dual clutch transmission.
- Think of it as an automatically shifting
manual transmission.
- Shift into Drive range and get fully
automatic shifting, similar to a con-
ventional automatic transmission.
• Ecoshift dual clutch transmission
adopts dry-type dual clutch, which is
different from torque converter of auto-
matic transmission, and shows better
acceleration performance during driv-
ing. But, initial launch might be little bit
slower than Automatic Transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers torque
and provides a direct driving feeling
which may feel different from a con-
ventional automatic transmission with
a torque converter. This may be more
noticeable when starting from a stop or
low vehicle speed.
• When rapidly accelerating at low vehi-
cle speed, engine could rev at high
rpm depending on vehicle drive condi-
tion.
• For smooth launch uphill, press down
the accelerator pedal smoothly
depending on the current conditions.
• If you release your foot from the accel-
erator pedal at low vehicle speed, you
may feel strong engine brake, which is
similar to manual transmission.
• When driving downhill, you may use
Sports Mode and press the paddle
shifters to downshift to a lower gear in
order to control your speed without
using the brake pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and off,
you may hear clicking sounds as the
system goes through a self test. This is
a normal sound for the Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission.
CAUTION
• To prevent clutch damage, the
clutch is released and the torque
flow is interrupted. If the clutch is
released, apply the foot brake,
shift into Park and wait several
seconds before driving again.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead to
damage to the transmission.
• If a transmission system problem
occurs, the transmission indica-
tor will blink. If this occurs, take
your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the
system checked.
(Continued)
525
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• When the clutch is overheated,
the safe protection mode oper-
ates. According to the safe pro-
tection mode, the transmission
indicator blinks with a chime
sound. In this time, the LCD warn-
ing about safe protection mode
also displays.
If this occurs, the transmission
may not shift smoothly due to
clutch overheating. To prevent
damage to the transmission
clutches, shift into Park and wait
for several seconds before driv-
ing again.
(Continued)
(Continued)
❈
Do not hold the vehicle on a hill
in Drive or Reverse by applying
the accelerator pedal because
the clutch may be overheated.
Instead, use the foot brake or
parking brake.
When the transmission shifts
automaticaly or manually, the
gear shifts may be noticeable;
however, this is characteristic of
the dual-clutch transmission and
does not indicate a transmission
concern.
• If the vehicle is held by applying
accelerator pedal on a hill, the
transmission and clutch will be
damaged. To hold on a hill, use
the parking brake or foot brake.
• During the first 1000 miles, you
may feel that the vehicle may not
be smooth when accelerating at
low speed. During this break-in
period, the shift quality and per-
formance of your new vehicle is
continuously optimized.
OFS045322L
■ For Type B cluster
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your transmis-
sion, do not accelerate the engine
in R (Reverse) or any forward gear
position with the brakes on.
• When stopped on a hill, do not
hold the vehicle with engine
power. Use the service brake or
the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
Driving your vehicle
265
Transmission ranges
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transmission and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even on
the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion. The transmission will automatically
shift through a 6-gear sequence, provid-
ing the best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the trans-
mission will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of
Reverse (R) or Drive (D) to prevent
damage to the transmission, except
as explained in “Rocking the vehi-
cle” in this section.
527
Driving your vehicle
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
DS mode (Drive Sporty)
DS mode supports the performance
mode for the driver. To shift into DS
mode, shift the transmission to DS mode.
If you shift [+] or [–] gear, the mode is
change to sports mode. The transmission
shift is automatically changed at higher
engine speeds by engine load, your driv-
ing style, vehicle, and condition.
In DS mode, while coasting downhill,
engine braking is not supported.
In DS mode, if you control the paddle
shifter, the gear will be changed to sports
mode. If the gear is changed to D (Drive),
the gear will be changed to D (Drive)
mode.
✽
NOTICE
While stopping the vehicle by applying
parking brake in D gear, even if you
release the parking brake, the vehicle
may not move. In this case, you can
drive the vehicle by applying the foot
brake and release, applying the acceler-
ator or shifting the lever (D
→
N
→
D).
✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone, the trans-
mission shifts automatically to a high-
er gear.
• To maintain the required levels of vehi-
cle performance and safety, the system
may not execute certain gearshifts
when the shift lever is operated.
• When accelerating from a stop on a
slippery road, push the shift lever for-
ward into the +(up) position. This
causes the transmission to shift into
the 2nd gear which is better for
smooth driving on a slippery road.
Push the shift lever to the -(down) side
to shift back to the 1st gear.
OFS050017
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Sports mode
Driving your vehicle
285
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when the
shift lever is in the D position, DS mode
or the sports mode.
The paddle shifter can operate when the
vehicle speed is more than 6.2 mph
(10km/h).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear and the system
changes from D (Drive) mode or DS
mode you used to sports mode.
If the vehicle speed is lower than 6.2 mph
(10km/h), if you depress the accelerator
pedal for more than 7 seconds, if you
shift the shift lever from D to sport mode
and shift it from sports mode to D again
or if you hold the paddle shifter [+] lever
over 1 second, the system will change
from sports mode to D (Drive) mode or
DS mode you used.
With the shift lever in the sport mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear.
✽
NOTICE
• If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you can't
shift gears.
• When you change the DS mode to
manual mode, by moving the shift
lever [+] or [-] or using the paddle
shifters, if you want to use DS mode
again, move the shift lever to D and
back to sports mode to activate DS
mode.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the EcoShift dual clutch
transmission has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transmission
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R
(Reverse) unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
To shift the transmission from P (Park) or
N (Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a clicking
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
OFS052018N
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the car.
529
Driving your vehicle
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
shift-lock access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the access
hole and press down on the screwdriv-
er.
3. Move the shift lever.
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. If the ignition switch is in any
other position, the key cannot be
removed.
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into R
(Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow the car.
• When driving in sports mode, slow
down before shifting to a lower gear.
Otherwise, the lower gear may not be
engaged.
• When parking the vehicle, always
engage the parking brake. Do not
depend on shifting into Park to keep
the vehicle from moving.
OFS055016
Driving your vehicle
305
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Do not rev up the engine. This may
cause engine over-heating, trans-
mission damage or failure, and tire
damage.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
531
Driving your vehicle
EcoShift dual clutch
Transmission operation
The EcoShift dual clutch transmission
has 7 forward speeds and one reverse
speed.
The individual speeds are selected auto-
matically in the D (Drive) position.
ECOSHIFT DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (FOR T-GDI) (IF EQUIPPED)
OFS055015
Depress the brake pedal when shifting, if your vehicle is equipped shift lock system.
The shift lever can be moved freely.
Driving your vehicle
325
• The Ecoshift dual clutch transmission
gives the driving feel of a manual trans-
mission, yet provides the ease of a
fully automatic transmission. Unlike a
traditional automatic transmission, the
gear shifting can be felt (and heard) on
the Ecoshift dual clutch transmission.
- Think of it as an automatically shifting
manual transmission.
- Shift into Drive range and get fully
automatic shifting, similar to a con-
ventional automatic transmission.
• Ecoshift dual clutch transmission
adopts dry-type dual clutch, which is
different from torque converter of auto-
matic transmission, and shows better
acceleration performance during driv-
ing. But, initial launch might be little bit
slower than Automatic Transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers torque
and provides a direct driving feeling
which may feel different from a con-
ventional automatic transmission with
a torque converter. This may be more
noticeable when starting from a stop or
low vehicle speed.
• When rapidly accelerating at low vehi-
cle speed, engine could rev at high
rpm depending on vehicle drive condi-
tion.
• For smooth launch uphill, press down
the accelerator pedal smoothly
depending on the current conditions.
• If you release your foot from the accel-
erator pedal at low vehicle speed, you
may feel strong engine brake, which is
similar to manual transmission.
• When driving downhill, you may use
Sports Mode and press the paddle
shifters to downshift to a lower gear in
order to control your speed without
using the brake pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and off,
you may hear clicking sounds as the
system goes through a self test. This is
a normal sound for the Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury
or death:
• ALWAYS check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position, then
set the parking brake, and place
the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed.
• Do not use engine braking (shift-
ing from a high gear to lower
gear) rapidly on slippery roads.
The vehicle may slip causing an
accident.
533
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
• To hold the vehicle on a hill use
the foot brake or the parking
brake. If the vehicle is held by
applying the accelerator pedal on
a hill the clutch and transmission
will be overheated resulting in
damage.
At this time, a warning message
will appear on the LCD display
and you may feel a vibration.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the clutch becomes overheated
by excessive use of the clutch to
hold on a hill, you may notice a
shudder feeling and a blinking
display on the instrument cluster.
When this occurs, the clutch is
disabled until the clutch cools to
normal temperatures. If this
occurs, pull over to a safe loca-
tion, shift into P (Park) and apply
the foot brake for a few minutes.
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake must be applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead to
damage to the transmission.
• If the display continues to blink,
for your safety, contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Under certain conditions such as
repeated launch on steep grades,
the clutch in the transmission
could overheat. When the clutch
is overheated, the safe protection
mode engages. If the safe protec-
tion mode engages, the gear posi-
tion indicator on the cluster
blinks with a chime sound. At this
time, a warning message will
appear on the LCD display and
driving may not be smooth.
If you ignore this warning, the
driving condition may become
worse. To return the normal driv-
ing condition, stop the vehicle
and apply the foot brake for a few
minutes before driving off.
(Continued)
OFS045317L
■ For Type C cluster
OFS045318L/OFS045319L
■ For Type C cluster
Driving your vehicle
345
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster
displays the shift lever position when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must depress
firmly on the brake pedal and make sure
your foot is off the accelerator pedal.
The shift lever must be in P (Park) before
turning the engine off.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
(Continued)
• Gear shifts may be more notice-
able than a conventional automat-
ic transmission. This is a normal
characteristic of this type of
EcoShift dual clutch transmis-
sion.
• During the first 1,000 miles, you
may feel that the vehicle may not
be smooth when accelerating at
low speed. During this break-in
period, the shift quality and per-
formance of your new vehicle is
continuously optimized.
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) while driving.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may cause
you to lose control of the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift lever
is in P (Park), apply the parking
brake, and turn the engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
535
Driving your vehicle
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart a
stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop
with the engine ON. Shift into P (Park) if
you need to leave your vehicle for any
reason.
Always depress the brake pedal when
you are shifting from N (Neutral) to
another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position. The
transmission will automatically shift
through a seven-gear sequence, provid-
ing the best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or driving uphill depress the
accelerator pedal further until you feel
the transmission downshift to a lower
gear.
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly.
+ (UP) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (DOWN) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one gear.
WARNING
Do not shift into gear unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Shifting into gear when the engine
is running at high speed can cause
the vehicle to move very rapidly.
You could lose control of the vehi-
cle and hit people or objects.
OFS050017
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Sports mode
Driving your vehicle
365
DS mode (Drive Sporty)
Ds mode supports the performance
mode for driver. To shift the Ds mode,
shift the transmission to Ds mode which
is center of sports mode. If you shift [+] or
[–] gear, the mode is change to sports
mode. The transmission shift is automat-
ically changed at higher engine speeds
by engine load, your driving style, vehicle
condition.
In Ds mode, while coasting downhill, the
engine does not support the vehicle to
slow down.
In Ds mode, if you control the paddle
shifter, the gear will be changed to sports
mode. If the gear is changed to D (Drive),
the gear will be changed to D (Drive)
mode.
✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 7 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-
ated.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when the
shift lever is in the D position, DS mode
or the sports mode.
The paddle shifter can operate when the
vehicle speed is more than 6.2 mph
(10km/h).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear and the system
changes from D (Drive) mode or DS
mode you used to sports mode.
OFS052018N
537
Driving your vehicle
If the vehicle speed is lower than 6.2 mph
(10km/h), if you depress the accelerator
pedal for more than 7 seconds, if you
shift the shift lever from D to sport mode
and shift it from sports mode to D again
or if you hold the paddle shifter [+] lever
over 1 second, the system will change
from sports mode to D (Drive) mode or
DS mode you used.
With the shift lever in the sport mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear.
✽
NOTICE
• If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you can't
shift gears.
• When you change the DS mode to
manual mode, by moving the shift
lever [+] or [-] or using the paddle
shifters, if you want to use DS mode
again, move the shift lever to D and
back to sports mode to activate DS
mode.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the EcoShift dual clutch
transmission has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transmission
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R
(Reverse) unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
To shift the transmission from P (Park) or
N (Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a clicking
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
shift-lock access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the access
hole and press down on the screwdriv-
er.
3. Move the shift lever.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the car.
OFS055016
Driving your vehicle
385
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. If the ignition switch is in any
other position, the key cannot be
removed.
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into R
(Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow the car.
• When driving in sports mode, slow
down before shifting to a lower gear.
Otherwise, the lower gear may not be
engaged.
• When parking the vehicle, always
engage the parking brake. Do not
depend on shifting into Park to keep
the vehicle from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
539
Driving your vehicle
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Do not rev up the engine. This may
cause engine over-heating, trans-
mission damage or failure, and tire
damage.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
Driving your vehicle
405
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would. The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when neces-
sary to maintain steering control on slip-
pery surfaces.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid
continuous application of the
brakes. Continuous brake applica-
tion will cause the brakes to over-
heat and could result in a tempo-
rary loss of braking performance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-
cle’s ability to safely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator
and brake pedal before driving,
you may depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
541
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
(if equipped)
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes.This is normal and does
not indicate a problem with your brakes.
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then pull up the park-
ing brake lever as far as possible without
pressing the release button.
In addition, it is recommended that when
parking the vehicle on an incline, the
transmission should be in the appropri-
ate low gear on manual transaxle vehi-
cles or in the P (Park) position on
Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual clutch
transmission vehicles.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
OFS050020
Driving your vehicle
425
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly press the
release button (1) and lower the parking
brake lever (2) while holding the button.
If the parking brake does not release or
does not release all the way, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation, it could
damage the vehicle system.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the
gearshift lever is securely posi-
tioned in 1st (First) gear or R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle
equipped vehicles and in P (Park)
for Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift
dual clutch transmission
equipped vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
OFS050021
543
Driving your vehicle
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated when
the parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on after
the parking brake is released while the
engine is running, there may be a mal-
function in the brake system. Immediate
attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-
cle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-
tion or repair shop.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-
lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situa-
tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-
trol the force being delivered to the
brakes.
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or danger-
ous driving maneuvers. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should be reduced if the
road condition calls for it, not just in
extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for cars
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (or Electronic Stability
Control system) may be longer than
for those without it in the following
road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESC) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself and others.
W-75
Driving your vehicle
445
✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev-
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your car
over to a safe place and stop the
engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with the ABS. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
545
Driving your vehicle
Electronic stability control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks
where you are steering and where the
vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the
brakes at individual wheels and
intervenes in the engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Control System is functioning properly.
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cor-
nering. Electronic stability control
(ESC) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in seri-
ous accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent acci-
dents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always fol-
low all the normal precautions for
driving - including driving at safe
speeds for the conditions.
OFS050022
Driving your vehicle
465
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned ON, ESC
and ESC OFF indicator lights illumi-
nate for approximately 3 seconds, then
ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button for at least
half a second after turning the ignition
ON to turn ESC off. (ESC OFF indica-
tor will illuminate). To turn the ESC on,
press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine, you may
hear a slight ticking sound. This is the
ESC performing an automatic system
self-check and does not indicate a
problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or driving on a slippery road,
pressing the accelerator
pedal may not cause the
engine rpm (revolutions per
minute) to increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
• To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF indicator light illu-
minates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESC
is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESC will automatically turn
on again.
547
Driving your vehicle
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC
OFF indicator light (ESC OFF ) illumi-
nates). At this state, the engine control
function does not operate. It means the
traction control function does not oper-
ate. Brake control function only operates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF ) for more than
3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator light (ESC
OFF ) illuminates and ESC OFF warn-
ing chime will sound.
At this state, the engine control function
and brake control function do not oper-
ate. It means the car stability control
function does not operate any more.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
the ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating or illuminates when
ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes on
when the ESC is turned off with the button.
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
OFS045344L/OFS045379L
■ Type B
■ Type C
OFS045342L/OFS045378L
■ Type B
■ Type C
Driving your vehicle
485
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should remain on for daily driving
whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the
ESC OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is
turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
Good braking practices
• After parking the vehicle, check to be
sure the parking brake is not engaged
and that the parking brake indicator
light is out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the car is washed. Wet brakes
can be dangerous! Your car will not
stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.
Wet brakes may cause the car to pull
to one side.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control sys-
tem is only a driving aid; use pre-
cautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and do not
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESC indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating (ESC indica-
tor light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out
of control.
WARNING
• Whenever you leave or park your
vehicle, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transaxle
into the P (Park) position. If the
parking brake is not fully
engaged, the vehicle may move
inadvertently and injure yourself
and others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
549
Driving your vehicle
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes light-
ly until the braking action returns to nor-
mal, taking care to keep the car under
control at all times. If the braking action
does not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
• Do not coast down hills with the car out
of gear. This is extremely hazardous.
Keep the car in gear at all times, use
the brakes to slow down, then shift to a
lower gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Do not "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driv-
ing can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and los-
ing their effectiveness. It also increases
the wear of the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
car pointed straight ahead while you
slow down. When you are moving slow-
ly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull
off the road and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a
Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission, don't let your vehi-
cle creep forward. To avoid creeping for-
ward, keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped.
• Use caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (Automatic
transaxle / Ecoshift dual clutch trans-
mission) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep the
vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi-
tion. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the gear
selector lever in P (Automatic transaxle
/ Ecoshift dual clutch transmission) or
in first or reverse gear (manual
transaxle) and block the rear wheels so
the vehicle cannot roll. Then release
the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the a hill with
the accelerator pedal. This can cause
the transaxle to overheat. Always use
the brake pedal or parking brake.
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further enhance-
ments to vehicle stability and steering
responses when the vehicle is driving on
a slippery road or the vehicle detects a
change in coefficient of friction between
the left and right wheels.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC indi-
cator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle and/or abnormal
steering responses (EPS). This is only
the effect of brake and EPS control and
indicates nothing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient
or incline
• Driving in reverse
• ESC OFF indicator light ( ) remains
on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
Driving your vehicle
505
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to turn off
the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the
ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button again.
The ESC OFF indicator light goes out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by press-
ing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that
a malfunction has been detected some-
where in the Electric Power Steering sys-
tem or VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light remains
on, take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
✽
NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9 mph)
on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (18
mph) when a vehicle is braking on a
split-mu road. The split-mu road is
made of surfaces which have different
friction forces.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to slip back
on a steep hill when the driver begins to
accelerate after a stop. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) helps prevent the
vehicle from slipping back by operating
the brakes automatically for about 2 sec-
onds. The brakes are released when the
accelerator pedal is depressed or after
about 2 seconds.
✽
NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when the
transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the
ESC is off but it does not activate
when the ESC has malfunctioned.
WARNING
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices but a sup-
plementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Always hold the steering wheel
firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to acti-
vate according to the driver’s
intention, even with installed
VSM. Always follow all the normal
precautions for driving at safe
speeds for the conditions –
including driving inclement
weather and on a slippery road.
• Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSM system
to malfunction. When replacing
tires, make sure they are the
same size as your original tires.
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for about
2 seconds, so always depress the
accelerator pedal to begin acceler-
ating after a stop.
551
Driving your vehicle
1. CRUISE indicator
2. SET indicator
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without resting your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
✽
NOTICE
During normal cruise control operation,
when the SET switch is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
✽
NOTICE
To activate cruise control, depress the
brake pedal at least once after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position or
starting the engine. This is to check if
the brake switch, which is important
part to cancel cruise control, is in nor-
mal condition.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated)
the cruise control can be activat-
ed unintentionally. Keep the
cruise control system off
(CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in
use, to avoid inadvertently set-
ting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the car at a constant speed, for
instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
• Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,
which may increase the vehicle
speed.
CAUTION
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not
shift into neutral without depress-
ing the clutch pedal, since the
engine will be overrevved. If this
happens, depress the clutch pedal
or release the cruise control ON-
OFF switch.
OFS053069
Driving your vehicle
525
To set cruise control speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button on the steer-
ing wheel, to turn the system on. The
CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 30 km/h (20 mph).
3. Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
SET indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate. Release the
accelerator pedal at the same time.
The desired speed will automatically
be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and hold
it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release
the lever at the speed you want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 2.0 km/h (1.2
mph) or 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) each time
you move the lever up (to RES+) in this
manner.
OFS055052N OFS055051NOFS055050N
553
Driving your vehicle
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 2.0 km/h (1.2
mph) or 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) each time
you move the lever down (to SET-) in
this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal if equipped
with a manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) if equipped with
an Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission.
• Press the CANCEL switch located on
the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 20 km/h (12 mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
OFS055052N OFS055053N
Driving your vehicle
545
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the SET indicator light
in the instrument cluster will go off), but it
will not turn the system off. If you wish to
resume cruise control operation, move
up the lever (to RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 30 km/h
(20 mph):
If any method other than the CRUISE
switch was used to cancel cruising speed
and the system is still activated, the most
recent set speed will automatically
resume when you move the lever up (to
RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
30 km/h (20 mph).
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Press the CRUISE button (the CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument cluster
will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise con-
trol operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To set cruise control speed”
on the previous page.
OFS055051N
555
Driving your vehicle
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency
by controlling the engine, transaxle and
air conditioner. But fuel-efficiency can be
changed by the driver's driving habits
and road conditions.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green) will
illuminate to show that the Active ECO
is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated, it
does not turn off even though the
engine is restarted again. To turn off
the system, press the active ECO but-
ton again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, it will return
to the ECO mode.
Limitation of Active ECO opera-
tion :
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though there is
no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is low:
The system will be limited until engine
performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because the
engine torque is restricted.
• When using sports mode:
The system will be limited according to
the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is deeply
pressed for a few seconds:
The system will be limited, judging that
the driver wants to speed up.
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OFS050037
Driving your vehicle
565
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-
lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the fol-
lowing driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-
ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to that of the other traffic so you
don't have to change speeds unneces-
sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
possible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you can
avoid unnecessary braking. This also
reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your car uses.
Driving at a moderate speed, especial-
ly on the highway, is one of the most
effective ways to reduce fuel consump-
tion.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can
increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components.
In addition, driving with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal may cause the
brakes to overheat, which reduces
their effectiveness and may lead to
more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-
ment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your car in good condition. For
better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your car
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. If you drive your
car in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see section 7
for details).
• Keep your car clean. For maximum serv-
ice, your vehicle should be kept clean
and free of corrosive materials. It is
especially important that mud, dirt, ice,
etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the car. This extra weight
can result in increased fuel consumption
and also contribute to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel
economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
557
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-
ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too high
a gear resulting in the engine bucking.
If this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-
ed by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operat-
ed by engine power so your fuel econ-
omy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled
inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine run-
ning. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
Driving your vehicle
585
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
✽
NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned OFF
prior to rocking the vehicle.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-slip
material under the drive wheels to pro-
vide traction when stalled in ice, snow,
or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between 1st (First)
and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped
with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an Automatic transaxle /
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission. Do not
race the engine, and spin the wheels as
little as possible. If you are still stuck after
a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by
a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating
and possible damage to the transaxle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
1JBB3302
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an Automatic
transaxle / Ecoshift dual clutch
transmission, while driving on slip-
pery surfaces can cause an acci-
dent. The sudden change in tire
speed could cause the tires to skid.
Be careful when downshifting on
slippery surfaces.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle dam-
age or failure, and tire damage.
559
Driving your vehicle
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
OBH058035L OMC035004
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Driving your vehicle
605
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-
pared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking oper-
ation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
561
Driving your vehicle
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire fail-
ure.
✽
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine. Inspect your
drive belt for proper tension, or have your
HYUNDAI dealer inspect this at the nor-
mal service intervals listed in section 7.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
Always check tires for proper
inflation before driving. For prop-
er tire pressures, refer to “Tires
and wheels” in section 8.
• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-
cient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tires can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tire tread before driving your
car. For further information and
tread limits, refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 7.
OMG015008
Driving your vehicle
625
More severe weather conditions of winter
result in greater wear and other prob-
lems. To minimize winter driving prob-
lems, you should follow these sugges-
tions:
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires on your
tires. If snow tires are needed, it is nec-
essary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment tires.
Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your car.
Furthermore, speeding, rapid accelera-
tion, sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns are potentially very haz-
ardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-
cations on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-
cient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehi-
cle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-
imum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tires. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
1JBB3305
563
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-
cates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the bat-
tery and cables as described in section
7. The level of charge in your battery can
be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or a service station.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and compo-
nents to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the con-
tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Driving your vehicle
645
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk of the parking
brake may freezing, apply it only tem-
porarily while you put the shift lever in P
(Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission) or in first or reverse
gear (manual transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and inter-
fere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the car to be sure the move-
ment of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weath-
er where you drive your car, you should
carry appropriate emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flashlight,
emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper
cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine compart-
ment
Placement of foreign objects or materials
which prevent cooling of the engine, in
the engine compartment, may cause a
failure or combustion. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the damage caused
by such placement.
565
Driving your vehicle
Tire and loading information label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
317 kg (699 lbs.)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OFS053064N/OFS055065N/OFS055063N/
OFS055062N/OFS053061N
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
Type E
Driving your vehicle
665
Seating capacity:
Total : 4 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 2 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit -
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg
(1400 lbs.) and there will be five 68
kg (150 lbs.) passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 295 kg (650 lbs.).
(635-272 (4 x 68) = 363 kg or
1400-600 (4 x 150) = 800 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
567
Driving your vehicle
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 317 kg
Weight (699 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
136 kg
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2
(300 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
249 kg
Luggage weight (549 lbs)
Example 1
ABC
OFS062030N
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 317 kg
Weight (699 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
272 kg
68 kg (150 lbs) × 4
(600 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
45 kg
Luggage weight (99 lbs)
ABC
Example 2
OFS062031N
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 317 kg
Weight (699 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
296 kg
74 kg (163 lbs) × 4
(652 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
21 kg
Luggage weight (47 lbs)
ABC
Example 3
Driving your vehicle
685
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pillar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
WARNING - Over loading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weigh-
ing the items (or people)
before putting them in the
vehicle. Be careful not to over-
load your vehicle.
• Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR, either
the maximum front or rear
GAWR and vehicle capacity
weight. If you do, parts,
including tires on your vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles
and braking ability. This could
cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehi-
cle.
569
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible
tire failure that could lead to a
crash.
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause increased stopping dis-
tances that could lead to a
crash.
• A crash resulting from poor
handling, vehicle damage, tire
failure, or increased stopping
distances could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Items you carry inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
occupants in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Never stack items, like suit-
cases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
• Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.
CAUTION
• Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would
not be covered by your warran-
ty. Do not overload your vehicle.
• Using heavier suspension com-
ponents to get added durability
might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help
you load your vehicle the right
way.
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, to keep your
loaded vehicle weight within its design
rating capability. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
the vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining
your vehicle's weight ratings, from the
vehicle's specifications and the certifica-
tion label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-
ment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-
tification label located on the driver’s
door sill.
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
VEHICLE WEIGHT
TRAILER TOWING
570
Driving your vehicle
6
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-3
If the engine will not start / 6-4
Emergency starting / 6-5
If the engine overheats / 6-7
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-8
If you have a flat tire (with spare tire) / 6-13
If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit) / 6-21
Towing / 6-27
Basic troubleshooting guide / 6-31
What to do in an emergency
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Depress the flasher switch with the igni-
tion switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehi-
cle is being towed.
OFS042083N
63
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-
cle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the car slow down while driving
straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes
immediately or attempt to pull off the
road as this may cause a loss of con-
trol. When the car has slowed to such
a speed that it is safe to do so, brake
carefully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and park on
firm, level ground. If you are on a divid-
ed highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the transaxle
in P (Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift
dual clutch transmission) or reverse
(manual transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the car.
Be sure they all get out on the side of
the car that is away from traffic.
4.When repairing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this sec-
tion.
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. If your vehicle has an Automatic
transaxle / Ecoshift dual clutch trans-
mission, be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, check all connectors at igni-
tion coils and spark plugs. Reconnect
any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. If the engine still does not start, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the vehicle to start it.
This could result in a collision or
cause other damage. In addition,
push or pull starting may cause the
catalytic converter to be over-
loaded and create a fire hazard.
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent techni-
cian or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not fol-
lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sul-
furic acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
car.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
1VQA4001
Jumper
terminal
Jumper Cables
Booster
battery
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-
volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2). Proceed to
connect one end of the other jumper
cable to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other end
to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for
example, the engine lifting bracket)
away from the battery (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that moves
when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
5. After jump start allow the engine to run
at least 20 minutes at idle or driving
before you shut off the vehicle to assure
the discharged battery is charged up
adequately. If you shut off the engine
earlier it may not restart again.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control sys-
tem.
Vehicles equipped with Automatic
transaxle / Ecoshift dual clutch transmis-
sion cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative ter-
minal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged bat-
tery to overheat and crack, releas-
ing battery acid.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
67
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you experience a loss of power,
or hear loud pinging or knocking, the
engine is probably too hot. If this hap-
pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Automatic
transaxle / Ecoshift dual clutch trans-
mission) or neutral (manual transaxle)
and set the parking brake. If the air
conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the car or steam is coming out from the
hood, stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped run-
ning or the steaming has stopped. If
there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the engine
running and check to be sure the
engine cooling fan is operating. If the
fan is not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check for
coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the car. (If the air con-
ditioning had been in use, it is normal
for clear water to be draining from it
when you stop.)
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for assistance.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine tem-
perature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If over-
heating happens again, call an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This may
result in coolant being blown out of
the opening and cause serious
burns.
What to do in an emergency
86
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided) should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
OFS060005
OFS045352L/OFS045305L
■ Type B ■ Type C
69
What to do in an emergency
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
✽
NOTICE
If the TPMS indicator does not illu-
minate for 3 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion or engine is running, or if it
comes on after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, take your car to
your nearest authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicator is illuminat-
ed, one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-
nering and anticipate increased stop-
ping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pil-
lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale
may flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated after restarting and about
20 minutes of continuous driving
before you have the low pressure tire
repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
What to do in an emergency
106
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under infla-
tion warning at the same time as sys-
tem failure then it will illuminate the
TPMS malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible to determine the cause
of the problem.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may illuminate if snow
chains or some separately
purchased devices such as
notebook computers, mobile
charger, remote starter, navi-
gation etc. are used in the
vehicle. This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
611
What to do in an emergency
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure will come on. Have the flat
tire repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble or replace the flat tire with the
spare tire (if equipped).
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure Telltale will blink or remain
on until the low pressure tire is
repaired and placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire (if equipped),
the Low Tire Pressure Telltale may
blink or illuminate after a few minutes
because no TPMS sensor mounted
on the spare wheel.
Once the low pressure tire is reinflat-
ed to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle the
TPMS malfunction indicator and the
low tire pressure telltale will extin-
guish within a few minutes of driving.
If the indicator is not extinguished
after a few minutes of driving, please
visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
CAUTION
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by HYUNDAI
to repair and/or inflate a low
pressure tire. The tire sealant not
approved by HYUNDAI may dam-
age the tire pressure sensor.
The sealant on the tire pressure
sensor and wheel shall be elem-
inated when you replace the tire
with a new one.
What to do in an emergency
126
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
Do not use any tire sealant
except the Tire Mobility Kit
approved by HYUNDAI if your
vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
The liquid sealant can damage
the tire pressure sensors.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may interfere with the
system's ability to warn the driv-
er of low tire pressure condi-
tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may void the warranty
for that portion of the vehicle.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
613
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment. Pull up the luggage
box cover to reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never use
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jack support.
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death. No person
should place any portion of
their body under a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack;
use vehicle support stands.
(Continued)
OFS060006
What to do in an emergency
146
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R (Reverse)
with manual transaxle or P (Park)
with Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift
dual clutch transmission.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
(Continued)
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
OFS060007 OED066033
615
What to do in an emergency
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Insert the screwdriver into the
groove of the wheel cap and pry
gently to remove the wheel cap (If
equipped).
7. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
WARNING -
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
OFS060009 OFS062010
What to do in an emergency
166
8. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
10. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them.
If this is difficult, tip the wheel
slightly and get the top hole in the
wheel lined up with the top stud.
Then jiggle the wheel back and
forth until the wheel can be slid
over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
OFS060011 OFS062012
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that prevents the
wheel from fitting firmly against
the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mount-
ing surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
617
What to do in an emergency
11. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
12. Lower the car to the ground by
turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it
until it is correct. Always reinstall the
valve cap after checking or adjusting
tire pressure. If the cap is not
replaced, air may leak from the tire. If
you lose a valve cap, buy another and
install it as soon as possible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
OFS060013
What to do in an emergency
186
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Important - use of compact spare tire
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare tire, it will take up less
space than a regular-size tire. This
tire is smaller than a conventional tire
and is designed for temporary use
only.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” sec-
tion 8.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
619
What to do in an emergency
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should you
exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a higher
speed could damage the tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly enough
for the road conditions to avoid all
hazards. Any road hazard, such as a
pothole or debris, could seriously
damage the compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life is
shorter than a regular tire. Inspect
your compact spare tire regularly
and replace worn compact spare
tires with the same size and design,
mounted on the same wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
80 km/h (50 mph). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
What to do in an emergency
206
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
adress.
OHYK065010
OHYK065011
OHYK064002
• Type A
■ Example
• Type B
• Type C
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
621
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix
to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and seal-
ing compound effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tire.
After you ensure that the tire is prop-
erly sealed you can drive cautiously
on the tire (distance up to 200 km
(120 miles)) at a max. speed of (80
km/h) in order to reach a service sta-
tion or tire dealer for tire replace-
ment.
OFS063021
CAUTION - One sealant for
one tire
When two or more tires are flat,
do not use the tire mobility kit
because the supported one
sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is
only used for one flat tire.
WARNING - Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
WARNING - Temporary fix
Have your tire repaired as soon
as possible. The tire may loose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the Tire Mobility
Kit.
OFS063022
What to do in an emergency
226
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the Tire
Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobil-
ity kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-
cles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
Please contact the nearest
HYUNDAI dealership if the tire
cannot be made roadworthy with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below -
-30°C (22°F).
623
What to do in an emergency
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
found date on the sealant con-
tainer). This can increase the
risk of tire failure.
WARNING - Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
OEL069020
What to do in an emergency
246
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driv-
er not to drive too fast.
2. Screw connection hose (9) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
3. Ensure that button (8) on the com-
pressor is not pressed.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose (2) of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing (4) of the compressor so
that the bottle is upright.
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7. Plug the compressor power cords
into the vehicle power outlet.
8. With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch posi-
tion on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately 5~7
minutes to fill the sealant up to
proper pressure. (refer to the Tire
and Wheels, chapter 8). The infla-
tion pressure of the tire after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the tire
and stay away from the tire when
filling it.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200kpa (29 PSI). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
WARNING - Carbon
monoxide
Do not leave your vehicle run-
ning in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
OFS063022
625
What to do in an emergency
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
7~10km (4~6miles or, about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be damaged by sealant, remove
the sealant stained with tire pressure
sensors and wheel and inspect in
authorized dealer.
Checking the tire inflation pres-
sure
1.After driving approximately 7~10km
(4~6miles or about 10min), stop at
a safety location.
2.Connect connection hose (9) of the
compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3.Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recomended tire inflation.
With the ignition swithched on, pro-
ceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure : Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
✽
NOTICE
The pressure gauge may show high-
er than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tire pressure, the compres-
sor needs to be turned off.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Press the button (8) on the
compressor.
What to do in an emergency
266
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure:
6 bar (87 psi)
Size
Compressor: 168 x 150 x 68 mm
(6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.)
Sealant bottle: 77 x ø 85 mm
(3.0 x ø 3.3 in.)
Compressor weight:
1.05 kg (2.31 lbs)
Sealant volume:
200 ml (12.2 cu. in.)
CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by HYUNDAI, the tire
pressure sensors may be dam-
aged by sealant. The sealant on
the tire pressure sensor and
wheel should be removed when
you replace the tire with a new
one and inspect the tire pressure
sensors in authorized dealer.
627
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an author-
ized Hyundai dealer or a commercial
tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-
ing procedures are necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel
dollies or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dol-
lies) and the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the rear.
OMC045012
dolly
A
B
C
CAUTION
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
HXD02
HXD03
What to do in an emergency
286
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tow-
ing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
Emergency towing (if equipped)
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow
truck service.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-
nal damage to the transaxle.
OFS060017
OFS060018
OFS060019
■ Type A
■ Type B
629
What to do in an emergency
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
attached to the front (or under the rear)
of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-
cle out of mud, sand or other condi-
tions from which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequent-
ly.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle cannot be
moved, do not forcibly continue
the towing. Contact an authorized
Hyundai dealer or a commercial
tow truck service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
What to do in an emergency
306
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16
feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle / Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neu-
tral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A driv-
er must be in the towed vehicle to
operate the steering and brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1 mile)
when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle fluid leak under
your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle fluid is leaking, a
flatbed equipment or towing dolly
must be used.
OUN046024
631
What to do in an emergency
BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Starter won't function
Engine turns over but
will not start
Engine misfires
Engine overheats
Engine stops while
driving
Fuel consumption is
excessive
Brake pedal is spongy
Braking power is
insufficient
Steering wheel is heavy
Steering wheel shakes
Steering wheel pulls to
one side while driving
Vehicle pulls to one side
while braking
Tire wear is abnormal
Charge warning light\
comes on while driving
Wipers, horn or lights
won't funciton
Battery discharge is
excessive
Engine overheating
Low fuel level
Fuel lines clogged
Fuel pump defective
Strainer clogged
Rich mixture
Water intrusion into fuel
Coolant leakage
High idle speed
Engine oil insufficient or defective
Battery fluid shortage
Battery discharged
Battery terminal poor contact
Starter or engine start/stop button malfunction
Ignition timing incorrect
Spark plugs deteriorated
Spark plugs defective
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
Starter won't function
Engine turns over but
will not start
Engine misfires
Engine overheats
Engine stops while
driving
Fuel consumption is
excessive
Brake pedal is spongy
Braking power is
insufficient
Steering wheel is heavy
Steering wheel shakes
Steering wheel pulls to
one side while driving
Vehicle pulls to one side
while braking
Tire wear is abnormal
Charge warning light\
comes on while driving
Wipers, horn or lights
won't funciton
Battery discharge is
excessive
Ignition circuit faulty
Ignition coil or condenser faulty
Distributor faulty
Alternator belt loose
Check fuses, bulbs or wiring
Brake dragging
Shift lever not positioned in "P" or "N" range
Frequent driving in lower gear
Air intrusion into brake lines
Brake fluid insufficient
Brake disc and pads wet
Brake pad wear
Wheel alignment incorrect
Wheel balance incorrect
Tire pressure incorrect (too low or high)
Tire size incorrect
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
OO
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
632
What to do in an emergency
7
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-3
Owner maintenance / 7-4
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-6
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-28
Engine oil / 7-31
Engine coolant / 7-33
Brake/clutch fluid / 7-36
Washer fluid / 7-37
Parking brake / 7-37
Air cleaner / 7-38
Climate control air filter / 7-40
Wiper blades / 7-42
Battery / 7-46
Tires and wheels / 7-49
Fuses / 7-62
Light bulbs / 7-72
Appearance care / 7-79
Emission control system / 7-85
Maintenance
Maintenance
27
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Positive battery terminal
5. Negative battery terminal
6. Fuse box
7. Air cleaner
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
OFS011003/OFS012004
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■ Gasoline 1.6 GDI
■ Gasoline 1.6 Turbo GDI
73
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehi-
cle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
perform this work.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has fac-
tory-trained technicians and genuine
HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality
service, see an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages. You need
this information to establish your compli-
ance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI’s high
service quality standards and receives
technical support from HYUNDAI in
order to provide you with a high level of
service satisfaction.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, sev-
eral procedures can be done only by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special
tools.
✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during the
warranty period may affect warranty
coverage. For details, read the separate
Service Passport provided with the vehi-
cle. If you're unsure about any servicing
or maintenance procedure, have it done
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
47
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer at the frequencies indicated to
help ensure safe, dependable operation
of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reser-
voir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while work-
ing under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose cloth-
ing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
75
Maintenance
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
eling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check Automatic transaxle / Ecoshift
dual clutch transmission P (Park) func-
tion.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air condition-
ing system during or after use is nor-
mal).
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with wash-
er fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate Automatic
transaxle / Ecoshift dual clutch trans-
mission linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Maintenance
67
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if
the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, fol-
low Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 32°C
(90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After 120 months or 240,000 km
(150,000 miles) continue to follow the
prescribed maintenance intervals.
77
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-
mined by whichever occurs first.
12,000 km or 6 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(12,000 km or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(12,000 km or 12 months)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
87
24,000 km or 12 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
(Continued)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(24,000 km or 24 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
79
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
36,000 km or 18 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(36,000 km or 36 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(36,000 km or 36 months)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
107
48,000 km or 24 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(48,000 km or 48 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(48,000 km or 48 months)
*
1
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-
tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
60,000 km or 30 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect EcoShift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(60,000 km or 60 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(60,000 km or 60 months)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
72,000 km or 36 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - TGDI
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(72,000 km or 72 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(72,000 km or 72 months)
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
84,000 km or 42 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(84,000 km or 84 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(84,000 km or 84 months)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
147
(Continued)
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect drive belts *
2
(First, 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
4
(Every 96,000 km or 72 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(96,000 km or 96 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(96,000 km or 96 months)
*
1
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-
tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
2
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced
excessively.
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
4
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if neces-
sary. A qualified technician should perform the operation.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
96,000 km or 48 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
(Continued)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
715
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
108,000 km or 54 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(108,000 km or 108 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(108,000 km or 108 months)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
167
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belts *
2
(First, 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(120,000 km or 120 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(120,000 km or 120 months)
120,000 km or 60 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect EcoShift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
(Continued)
*
2
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced
excessively.
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
717
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
132,000 km or 66 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(132,000 km or 132 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(132,000 km or 132 months)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
187
144,000 km or 72 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect drive belts *
2
(First, 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - TGDI
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(144,000 km or 144 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(144,000 km or 144 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
*
1
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-
tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
2
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced
excessively.
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
719
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
156,000 km or 78 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(156,000 km or 156 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(156,000 km or 156 months)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
207
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
168,000 km or 84 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
*
2
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced
excessively.
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belts *
2
(First, 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - GDI
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(168,000 km or 168 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(168,000 km or 168 months)
721
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
180,000 km or 90 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect EcoShift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(180,000 km or 180 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(180,000 km or 180 months)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
227
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
192,000 km or 96 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belts *
2
(First, 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Inspect valve clearance*
4
(Every 96,000km or 72 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(192,000 km or 192 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 192,000 km or 120 months after every 40,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(192,000 km or 192 months)
*
1
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-
tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
2
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced
excessively.
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
4
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if neces-
sary. A qualified technician should perform the operation.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
723
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or 6
months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
204,000 km or 102 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(204,000 km or 204 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(204,000 km or 204 months)
Maintenance
247
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
216,000 km or 108 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belts *
2
(First, 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - TGDI
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(216,000 km or 216 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(216,000 km or 216 months)
*
2
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced
excessively.
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
725
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
228,000 km or 114 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(228,000 km or 228 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(228,000 km or 228 months)
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
267
240,000 km or 120 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - TGDI
(Every 10,000km)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect EcoShift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belts *
2
(First, 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - GDI *
5
(240,000 km or 240 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 192,000 km or 120 months after every 40,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
3
(240,000 km or 240 months)
*
1
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-
tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
2
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced
excessively.
*
3
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
5
: TGDI - At first, replace at 5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
727
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km in normal tempera-
ture or less than 16 km in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart
below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER - GDI R EVERY 6,000 KM OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER - TGDI R EVERY 5,000 KM OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY A, B, H, I, K
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 96,000 KM C, E, F, G, H, I, J
MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID /
ECOSHIFT DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID
R EVERY 120,000 KM A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J
FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, F
PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 12,000 KM OR 6 MONTHS C, D, E, F, G, H, I
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
Maintenance
287
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more fre-
quent oil and filter changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-
ration and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as neces-
sary.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an exces-
sive amount of foreign matter accumu-
lates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. Have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
any damaged or leaking parts immedi-
ately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-
cate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat dam-
age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and cou-
plings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
729
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Cooling system
Check cooling system components, such
as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Manual transaxle fluid / Ecoshift
dual clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle or Ecoshift
dual clutch transmission fluid according
to the maintenance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid should
be changed at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer in accordance to the scheduled
maintenance at the beginning of this
chapter.
✽
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is basi-
cally red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake/clutch fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunc-
tion and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
Maintenance
307
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system includ-
ing the parking brake pedal and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-
fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,
or damage. Start the engine and listen
carefully for any exhaust gas leakage.
Tighten connections or replace parts as
necessary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-
essary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage.
731
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F (Full) and L (Low).
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capaci-
ties” in section 8.)
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immedi-
ately.
OFS070002 OFS070003
Maintenance
327
Changing the engine oil and filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the begin-
ning of this section.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irrita-
tion or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory ani-
mals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
733
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap while the engine is oper-
ating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in seri-
ous personal injury from escap-
ing hot coolant or steam.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the cool-
ing system. When you are sure all
the pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using a
thick towel, and continue turning
counterclockwise to remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
The electric motor
(cooling fan) is con-
trolled by engine
coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed. It may some-
times operate even when the
engine is not running. Use extreme
caution when working near the
blades of the cooling fan so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan
blades. As the engine coolant tem-
perature decreases, the electric
motor will automatically shut off.
This is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling fan)
may operate until you disconnect
the negative battery cable.
The electric cooling fan can start at
any time when the engine coolant
temperature is high. Disconnect the
negative battery cable when servic-
ing the vehicle.
Maintenance
347
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side of the
coolant reservoir when the engine is
cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water. Bring the level
to F, but do not overfill. If frequent addi-
tions are required, see an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling system
inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deion-
ized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improp-
er coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum
engine parts and must be protected by
an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to pre-
vent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
OFS072004
OFS072042
■ Type A
■ Type B
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze
Water
735
Maintenance
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure causing serious injury.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric around
the radiator cap before refilling the
coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts such as generator.
OFS072005
Maintenance
367
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Checking the brake/clutch fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area
around the reservoir cap thoroughly to
prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition asso-
ciated with the wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, have
the brake system or clutch (if equipped)
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants or capaci-
ties” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Brake/clutch
fluid
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
WARNING - Loss of brake/
clutch fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to contact
the vehicle's body paint, as paint
damage will result. Brake fluid,
which has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should never
be used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be disposed
of properly. Don't put in the wrong
kind of fluid. A few drops of miner-
al-based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
OFS070006
737
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you
can check the level with a quick visual
inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’’ heard
while fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-
ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contacting
windshield washer fluid. Serious
injury or death could occur.
OFS070007 OFS050020
PARKING BRAKE
Maintenance
387
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced at the recommended
replacement intervals and cannot be
reused.
During inspection intervals, you can light-
ly clean the air filter element by using
compressed air. if air cleaner still looks
dirty and restrictive, then replace it.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
OFS070008 OFS070009 OFS070010
739
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual recom-
mended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage condi-
tions” in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner fil-
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use
of non-genuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor and
engine.
Maintenance
407
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should be
replaced according to the Maintenance
Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it should
be inspected more frequently and
replaced earlier. When you replace the
climate control air filter, replace it per-
forming the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box.
2. Loosen the screws (1) and then
remove the glove box inner panel.
OFS070011 OFS070012
741
Maintenance
3. Remove the climate control air filter
cover while pressing the lock on the
right side of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽
NOTICE
Install a new climate control air filter in
the correct direction with the arrow
symbol (
↓
) facing downwards.
Otherwise, the climate control effects
may decrease, possibly with a noise.
OBK075017OFS070013
Maintenance
427
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
shield wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
1JBA5122
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
743
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
1LDA5023
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
OHM078059
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
Maintenance
447
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull
down the blade assembly and remove
it.
3. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
4. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
Type C
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Turn the wiper blade clip. Then lift up
the blade clip.
3. Push the clip (1) and push up the
wiper arm (2).
OYF079061
OYF079062
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
OHM078059
OSBL071001
OSBL071003
745
Maintenance
4. Push down the wiper arm (3) and
install the new blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the windshield.
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade (1).
2. Pull out the wiper blade assembly (2).
3. Install the new blade assembly (3) by
inserting the center part into the slot in
the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade
to the original position.
4. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, we recommend that
the wiper blade be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OSBL071002
OFS072065
OFS072066
Maintenance
467
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the bat-
tery cables.
OFS070015
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or any burning sensa-
tion, get medical attention
immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
(Continued)
Pb
747
Maintenance
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while vehicle was not in use) jump start
the vehicle from another battery and run
the engine at least 20 minutes at idle
before driving. Do not turn off the engine
for 30 minutes total of idle and/or driving
as the battery may not have sufficient
recharge to start.
CAUTION
• When the vehicle is not used for a
long time in the low tempera-
tures, remove the battery and
stores it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully to
prevent the battery case from
being damaged in low tempera-
tures.
• If you use unauthorized electric
devices, the battery may be dis-
charged. Never use unauthorized
devices.
(Continued)
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warn-
ings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
Maintenance
487
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
WARNING
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
• Operation related to the battery
should be done at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
749
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.
All specifications (sizes and pressures)
can be found on a label attached to the
driver’s side center pillar.
WARNING - Tire
underinflation
Severe underinflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OMD060012N
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
Maintenance
507
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (one
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
751
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling, loss of vehi-
cle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pres-
sure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every time
you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
Maintenance
527
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
OBH078040
Without a spare tire
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire (if equipped) for tire rota-
tion.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
753
Maintenance
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
WARNING - Replacing
tires
To reduce the chance or serious
or fatal injuries from an acci-
dent caused by tire failure or
loss of vehicle control:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
too little or too much pressure
in your tires. This can lead to
uneven wear and tire failure.
• When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires
on the same car. You must
replace all tires (including the
spare) if moving from radial to
bias-ply tires.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Using tires and wheel other
than the recommended sizes
could cause unusual handling
characteristics and poor vehi-
cle control, resulting in a seri-
ous accident.
• Wheels that do not meet
HYUNDAI’s specifications
may fit poorly and result in
damage to the vehicle or
unusual handling and poor
vehicle control.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly.
Maintenance
547
Compact spare tire replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling char-
acteristics, ground clearance,
body-to-tire clearance, snow
chain clearance, speedometer
and odometer calibration, head-
light aim and bumper height.
755
Maintenance
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P195/65R15 94H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
cars or light trucks; however, not
all tires have this marking).
195 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
15 - Rim diameter in inches.
94 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX15
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
15 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
Maintenance
567
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2015.
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden tire
failure, which could lead to a
loss of control and an accident
involving serious injury or death.
757
Maintenance
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire man-
ufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The
letter "R" means radial ply construc-
tion; the letter "D" means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the letter "B"
means belted-bias ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that can
be carried by the tire. When replacing
the tires on the vehicle, always use a
tire that has the same load rating as
the factory installed tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example: TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Maintenance
587
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, Ecoshift dual clutch
transmission, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi) before a tire has
built up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
759
Maintenance
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg
(150 pounds).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Maintenance
607
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and dividing 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
HYUNDAI specifies all season tires
on some models to provide good
performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on
some models to provide superior per-
formance on dry roads. Summer tire
performance is substantially reduced
in snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire side wall. if you
plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions. HYUNDAI recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4
psi) more air pressure than the pres-
sure recommended for the standard
tires on the tire label on the driver's
side of the center pillar, or up to the
maximum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75
mph) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radial-
ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle. Radial-
ply tires have the same load carrying
capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted
tires of the same size, and use the
same recommended inflation pres-
sure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with
bias-ply or bias belted tires is not rec-
ommended. Any combinations of radi-
al-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires
when used on the same vehicle will
seriously deteriorate vehicle handling.
The best rule to follow is: Identical
radial-ply tires should always be used
as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more sus-
ceptible to irregular tread wear. It is
very important to follow the tire rota-
tion interval shown in this section to
achieve the tread life potential of these
tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply
tires are repairable only in the tread
area, because of sidewall flexing.
Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply
tire repairs.
761
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easier
to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
• When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driv-
ing, inspect tires and wheels.
• When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
• If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slight-
est hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire infor-
mation on the tire sidewall.
Maintenance
627
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one locat-
ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, the
other in the engine compartment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, discon-
nect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and multi fuse for higher amperage rat-
ings.
✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
WARNING - Fuse
replacement
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse -
even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
OBK079042
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Multi fuse
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
763
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
OFS070016
OFS070017
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips. The incomplete fas-
tening fuse or relay may cause the
vehicle wiring and electric sys-
tems damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and termi-
nals may be fastened incomplete-
ly, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, consult with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a driv-
er or wiring. It may cause contact
failure and system malfunction.
Maintenance
647
If the headlights or other electrical com-
ponents do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse panel in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF posi-
tion, some items must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not work
properly.
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
OFS070016 OFS070019
CAUTION
Always place the fuse switch in the
ON position while driving the vehicle.
765
Maintenance
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine com-
partment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Remove the fuse panel in the engine
compartment.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽
NOTICE
If the main or multi fuse is blown, con-
sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water contact.
OBK072022
Maintenance
667
Fuse/relay panel description
Inner fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing
fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehi-
cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
OFS070022
OFS073050N
767
Maintenance
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
Description Fuse rating Protected component
C/LIGHTER 15A Cigarette Lighter
DRL 10A Not Used
HTD STRG 15A Smart Key Control Module, A/C Inverter Module, Steering wheel heated
MDPS 10A EPS Control Module
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)
POWER OUTLET 15A Power Outlet
WIPER RR 15A Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch
IG 2 10A
Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Front Wiper Relay, Blower Relay), Crash Pad Switch,
Panaroma Sunroof Motor, A/C Control Module, IPS Control Module
WIPER FRT 25A Multifunction Switch, Front Wiper Motor, Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Front Wiper Relay)
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Sport Mode Switch, Shift Lever Indicator, MTS Module
AUDIO 10A
Power Outside Mirror Switch, AMP, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, MTS Module,
Smart Key Control Module, IPS Control Module
MULTIMEDIA 15A A/V & Navigation Head Unit, MTS Module
A/BAG 15A Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor, SRS Control Module, Telltale
IG 1 10A
Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist Sensor Center LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist Buzzer,
IPS Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Switch, MTS Module,
A/C Control Module
1 SMART KEY 15A Smart Key Control Module
MEMORY 10A Data Link Connector, Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module
A/CON 10A ECM
ABS 10A ESC Module, ESC Off Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (HAC Relay, Multipurpose Check Connector)
DR LOCK 20A
Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, Flasher Sound Relay, Tail Gate Latch Relay,
Two Turn Unlock Relay, IPS Control Module
FOLD'G MIRR/
FOG LP RR
15A Not Used
Maintenance
687
Description Fuse rating Protected component
STOP LAMP 15A Stop Lamp Switch, Stop Signal Relay, Smart Key Control Module
ECU 10A Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module, ECM, Stop Lamp Switch
AMP 25A AMP
INVERTER 25A A/C Inverter Module
INTERIOR LAMP 10A Luggage Room Lamp, Map Lamp, Room Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Overhead Console Lamp
2 SMART KEY 10A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module, Start Stop Button Switch
TCU *
(VACUUM PUMP)
T-GDI 15A Engine Room Fuse & relay box (Vacuum Pump Relay)
GDI 15A TCM
TAIL LAMP LH 10A
Rear Combination Lamp LH, License Lamp LH/RH, Shift Lever Indicator, Instrument Cluster,
Multifunction Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch, Power Window Main Switch, AUX & USB Jack,
Inside Miiror A/C Control Module, ESC Off Switch, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Crash Pad Switch,
Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Switch, Head Lamp LH
S/HEATER 20A Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer
P/WDW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch
START 10A
Burglar Alarm Relay, Transaxle Range Switch, Smart Key Control Module, ECM, TCM,
Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay)
1 B/UP LP 15A Back-Up Lamp Switch, Transaxle Range Switch
TAIL LAMP RH 10A Head Lamp RH, Rear Combination Lamp RH
SAFETY POWER
WINDOW
25A Driver Safety Power Window Module
P/WDW RH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH
2 B/UP LAMP 10A
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Transaxle Range Switch, MTS Module, TCM,
Back-Up Lamp Switch, Rear Combination Lamp LH/RH, IPS Control Module
SPARE 15A -
HTD MIRR 10A ECM, A/C Control Module, Dirver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
P/SEAT DRV 25A Lumber Support
769
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
OFS070023
OFS075052N
Maintenance
707
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Description Fuse rating Protected component
MULTI
FUSE
MDPS 80A EPS Control Module
BLOWER 40A Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay)
1 DCT GDI 40A TCM
RR HTD 40A Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Rear Defogger Relay)
ALT
GDI 125A
Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Multi Fuse - EcoShift dual clutch transmission 1,
MDPS, RR HTD, BLOWER), Alternator
T-GDI 150A
2 ABS 30A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Module
2 B+ 50A
Smart Junction Box (Power Window Relay, IPS Control Module (ARISU LT),
Fuse - SAFETY POWER WINDOW, AMP)
1 B+ 50A
Leak Current Autocut Device (Room Lamp Relay, Leak Current Autocut Switch,
Fuse - INTERIOR LAMP, MULTIMEDIA, MEMORY ), Fuse - S/HEATER
FUSE
C/FAN
GDI 40A Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Cooling Fan (High) Relay, Cooling Fan (Low) Relay)
T-GDI 60A Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Cooling Fan (High) Relay)
A/CON 10A Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (A/CON Relay)
FOG LAMP FRT 10A Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Fog Lamp Relay)
HORN 15A Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay, Horn Relay)
SUNROOF 20A Panorama Sunroof Motor
VACUUM PUMP T-GDI 20A Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Vacuum Pump Relay)
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
IG 2 40A
Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG 2 Relay),
Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay)
IG 1 40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG 1 Relay, ACC Relay)
771
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
FUSE
1 SENSOR 20A ECM
2 SENSOR
GDI 10A
Oxygen Sensor (Up)/(Down), Canister Close Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Purge
Control Solenoid Valve, Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Cooling Fan (High/Low) Relay)
T-GDI 10A
Oxygen Sensor (Up)/(Down), Canister Close Valve, Recirulation valve, Waste gate valve,
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Cooling Fan (High) Relay)
3 SENSOR 15A
Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Fuel Pump Relay), Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box
(A/CON Relay), Oil Control Valve #1 (Intake)/#2 (Exhaust), ECM
2 ECU 15A ECM
3 DCT GDI 15A TCM
F/PUMP
GDI 15A
Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Fuel Pump Relay)
T-GDI 20A
BRAKE SWITCH 10A Stop Lamp Fuse
1 ABS 40A ESC Module
1 ECU 30A Engine Room Fuse & Relay Box (Engine Conrol Relay, Fuse - ECU 2)
2 DCT GDI 40A TCM
3 B+ 50A
Smart Junction Box (Tail Lamp Relay, IPS Control Module (ARISU RT),
Fuse - STOP LP, SMART KEY 1/2, INVERTER 2, DR LOCK )
3 ECU 10A Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid
4 ECU 15A Condenser, Ignition coil #1/#2/#3/#4
Maintenance
727
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽
NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the LOCK position and turn off the
lights to avoid sudden movement
of the vehicle and burning your fin-
gers or receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. In many cases, it is difficult
to replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the vehicle
must be removed before you can
get to the bulb. This is especially
true if you have to remove the head-
light assembly to
get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing
the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
773
Maintenance
Headlight, position light, turn signal
light, front fog light bulb replacement
(1) Headlight (Low)
(2) Headlight (High) / DRL*
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Position
(5) Front fog light*
(6) Side marker
* if equipped
Headlight bulb
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
G270A03O
WARNING - Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands.
Residual oil may cause the bulb
to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
(Continued)
OFS072025L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OFS070025
Maintenance
747
✽
NOTICE
If the headlight aiming adjustment is
necessary after the headlight assembly is
reinstalled, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
4. Install a new headlight bulb.
5. Connect the headlight bulb socket
connector.
6. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-
ing it clockwise.
Position light
If the light does not operate, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OFS072026
775
Maintenance
Turn signal light
1. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket
2. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
3. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)
1. Remove the under cover by rotating
the screws.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the
front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from
the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing and
turn the socket clockwise.
6. Connect the power connector to the
socket.
Front side marker
1. Remove the bulb from socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until tabs on the bulb align
with the slots in the socket. Pull the
bulb out of the socket.
2. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
3. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
OFS072042L
Maintenance
767
Side repeater light bulb replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Back-up light
(3) Rear turn signal light
(4) Sidemarker
(5) Rear reflex reflector
Outside
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the outside light assembly
retaining screws with a cross-tip
screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
OFS070029
OFS070030
OFS070028
OFS070027
777
Maintenance
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with the
slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the
socket and pushing or rotating it until it
locks into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the body
of the vehicle.
9. Tighten the screws.
High mounted stop light
replacement
1. Open the tailgate
2. Remove the tailgate upper trim
3. Remove the socket by turning it coun-
terclockwise
4. Disconnect the cable
5. Install a new HMSL assembly
License plate light bulb replace-
ment
1. Remove the lens by pushing the cover.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall.
OFS070034
CAUTION
Be careful when removing the plas-
tic mounting clips in cold weather,
it may crack.
OFS070032
OFS072062N
Maintenance
787
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-
ton is depressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
■ Luggage room lamp■ Front map lamp
■ Center room lamp
OMD070044/ORB070064/OFS070035
779
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
Maintenance
807
CAUTION - Matte paint
If your vehicle has Matte paint, make
certain you maintain it properly to
preserve the matte appearance.
Proper, care is required to maintain
the matte appearance. The normal
paint warranty applies to defects in
material and/or workmanship, but
not the uniform matte appearance.
• Rub marks, burnish marks, and
shiny spots are likely to require
repainting at a body shop trained
in matte paint repair.
• Do not rub the paint or allow auto-
matic car wash brushes to contact
the paint. Hand wash with soft
washmits, dry with clean chamois,
and use light pressure with a
microfiber towel. Minimize the pres-
sure you use. Do not rub repeated-
ly to minimize the risk of burnish-
ing a shiny spot. Coarse terry cloth
will easily burnish the paint.
• Test all products on a hidden part
(such as under the rocker sills) to
make certain they do not alter the
matte appearance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Pre-rinse the paint prior to wash-
ing to remove coarse dirt that can
scratch the paint. Pressure wash-
ing is OK with a fan nozzle and a
minimum of 10 inches between
the nozzle and paint.
• Use a detergent specifically for-
mulated for matte paint.
• Use a shampoo made for matte
paint.
• Spot treat heavy dirt accumula-
tion with a cleaner made for matte
paint.
• Most solvent based tar and bug
remover products can be used,
followed by a alcohol/water or
paint cleaner. Test before using in
a visible area.
• Most waxes and paint sealers will
add gloss, and are very difficult or
impossible to remove. Special
waxes and sealers made for matte
paint offer protection from
insects, bird droppings, and con-
taminations, but may affect the
appearance. If applied evenly, the
appearance will be uniform, and
may please some owners. Test
before using.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits or engine
and related components located
in the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components and
air duct inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
OJB037800
781
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because it
is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will
do more harm than good to wet down the
road grime without removing it. The lower
edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame
members have drain holes that should not
be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water
in these areas can cause rusting.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
Maintenance
827
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel after it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid deter-
gents. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum wheels coated with a clear
protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro-
sion, we produce cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unpro-
tected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly impor-
tant. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when tempera-
tures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis-
persed. For all these reasons, it is par-
ticularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from get-
ting started by observing the following:
783
Maintenance
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the compo-
nents under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accu-
mulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly effec-
tive in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-
able environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of cor-
rosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly
corrosive and may damage painted sur-
faces in just a few hours. Always remove
bird droppings as soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
Maintenance
847
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-
metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions for the proper way to
clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-
bing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
• When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
785
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Service Passport
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
sion control system to meet all applicable
emission regulations.
There are three emission control sys-
tems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is recom-
mended that you have your car inspected
and maintained by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-
ing during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system off by pressing the
ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase.This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
(including ORVR: Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel vapors
from escaping into the atmosphere.
(The ORVR system is designed to allow
the vapors from the fuel tank to be
loaded into a canister while refueling at
the gas station, preventing the escape of
fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant tempera-
ture is low during idling, the PCSV closes
so that evaporated fuel is not taken into
the engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens
to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.
Maintenance
867
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever sus-
pect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though color-
less and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions on this
page to avoid CO poisoning.
CAUTION
If you use unauthorized electric
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety. Be careful not to install after-
market devices that may affect vehi-
cle operation.
787
Maintenance
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-
line engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle. Additionally,
such actions could void your warranties.
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as grass, vegeta-
tion, paper, leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot while the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off. Keep
away from the exhaust and cat-
alytic system, you may get
burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for cor-
rosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
• When the engine is running or
turning off, do not touch catalytic
system and other exhaust sys-
tems because it is hot. If you
touch that, you may be burned.
8
Engine / 8-2
Dimensions / 8-2
Bulb wattage / 8-2
Tires and wheels / 8-3
Weight/volume / 8-4
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-5
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-8
Vehicle certification label / 8-8
Tire specification and pressure label / 8-9
Engine number / 8-9
Refrigerant label / 8-9
Specifications & Consumer information
Specifications & Consumer information
28
ENGINE
DIMENSIONS
Item
Gasoline
Displacement
cc (cu. in)
1591 (97.09)
Bore x Stroke
mm (in.)
77x85.44 (3.03x3.36)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line
BULB WATTAGE
* : If equipped
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Headlights
High 55 H7
Low 55 H7HPLL/H11B*
Front turn signal lights 27 PY27W
Position lights LED LED
Sidemarker 5 W5W
Front fog lights*
GDI 27 H27W
T-GDI 35 H8
Side repeater LED LED
Stop and tail lights 28/8 P28/8W
Rear turn signal lights 27 PY27W
Back-up lights 16 W16W
High mounted stop light LED LED
License plate lights 5 W5W
Front map lamp 8 FESTOON 8W
Center room lamp* 8 FESTOON 8W
Luggage room lamp 5 FESTOON 5W
Item
mm (in.)
GDI T-GDI
Overall length 4220 (166.1) 4250 (167.3)
Overall width 1790 (70.5) 1805 (71.1)
Overall
height
P215/45 R17 1399 (55.1) -
225/40 R18 1405 (55.3) 1405 (55.3)
Front tread
P215/45 R17 1561 (61.5) -
225/40 R18 1547 (60.9) 1547 (60.9)
Rear tread
P215/45 R17 1574 (62.0) -
225/40 R18 1560 (61.4) 1560 (61.4)
Wheelbase 2650 (104.3) 2650 (104.3)
83
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
*
1
Normal load : Up to 2 persons
*
2
If your vehicle is not equipped a compact spare tire, you will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit.
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
Item Tire size Wheel size
Cold tire inflation pressure kPa (psi)
Wheel lug nut
torque kg•m
(lb•ft, N•m)
Normal load *
1
Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
P215/45R17 7.0J×17
230
(33)
230
(33)
230
(33)
230
(33)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
225/40R18 7.5J×18
Compact spare tire*
2
(if equipped)
T125/80D15 4.0T×15
420
(60)
420
(60)
420
(60)
420
(60)
T125/80D16 4.0T×16
Specifications & Consumer information
48
WEIGHT/VOLUME
Item GDI TGDI
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)
Manual transaxle 1700 (3748) 1750 (3858)
Automatic transaxle 1700 (3748) 1750 (3858)
EcoShift dual clutch transmission 1700 (3748) 1750 (3858)
Luggage volume
cu ft (l)
440 (15.5)
85
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant
Volume Classification
Engine oil
*1 *2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
GDI
3.6 l (3.8 US qt.)
API Service SM*
3
,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
T-GDI
4.5 l (4.8 US qt.)
ACEA A5 or above
Automatic transaxle fluid T-GDI
7.1 l (7.5 US qt.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV
SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV
HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV
Manual transaxle fluid
GDI
1.6~1.7 l
(1.7~1.8 US qt.)
HK MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
API GL-4, SAE 70W
Use the Manual transaxle fluid approved by HYUNDAI motor
company. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
T-GDI
1.7~1.8 l
(1.8~1.9 US qt.)
EcoShift dual clutch transmis-
sion fluid
GDI
1.9~2.0 l
(2.01~2.11 US qt.)
HK MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
API GL-4, SAE 70W
Use the EcoShift dual clutch transmission fluid approved by
HYUNDAI motor company.
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
T-GDI
Specifications & Consumer information
68
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-
omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure
in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you may substitute API service SL.
Lubricant
Volume Classification
Coolant
Automatic transaxle
5.2 l (5.5 US qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
Manual Transaxle
5.0 l (5.28 US qt.)
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission
Brake/clutch fluid
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
50 l (13.2 US gal.)
Unleaded gasoline
87
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can
provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher vis-
cosity engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of
any viscosity other than those recom-
mended could result in engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be oper-
ated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Engine Oil (GDI) *
1
Engine Oil (T-GDI) *
2
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
5W-30, 5W-40
°C
(°F)
*
1
. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if
the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
2
. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade 5W-30 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEA A5 or
above). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country,
select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
Specifications & Consumer information
88
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your car
and in all legal matters pertaining to its
ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the front passenger’s seat. To
check the number, open the cover (1).
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s side center pillar contains
the vehicle identification number (VIN).
OFS080001
■ Type A
OYN089002
■ Type B
OFS080002
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
89
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best perform-
ance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures rec-
ommended for your car.
ENGINE NUMBER
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
REFRIGERANT LABEL
(IF EQUIPPED)
The refrigerant label is located on the
underside of the hood.
OFS072061N
OYN089003
OFS082003
